756

CONTENTS

Parts marked with “ ” are important for maintaining the safety of the machine. Be sure to replace these partswith the replacement parts specified to maintain the safety and performance of the machine.

SHARP CORPORATIONThis document has been published to be usedfor after sales service only.

SERVICE MANUALCODE : 00ZARM155/A1E

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM

AR-M150AR-M155

MODEL AR-M155X(AR-M155)

[ 1 ] GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1

[ 2 ] SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1

[ 3 ] CONSUMABLE PARTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1

[ 4 ] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1

[ 5 ] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1

[ 6 ] COPY PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1

[ 7 ] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1

[ 8 ] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1

[ 9 ] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1

[10] TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1

[11] MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1

[12] USER PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1

[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 1

[14] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 1

[15] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 1

The contents are subject to change without notice.

CAUTION

This laser radiation is not a danger to the skin, but when an exact focusing of the laser beam is achievedon the eye’s retina, there is the danger of spot damage to the retina.

The following cautions must be observed to avoid exposure of the laser beam to your eyes at the time ofservicing.

1) When a problem in the laser optical unit has occurred, the whole optical unit must be exchanged as aunit, not as individual parts.

2) Do not look into the machine with the main switch turned on after removing the developer unit, tonercartridge, and drum cartridge.

3) Do not look into the laser beam exposure slit of the laser optical unit with the connector connectedwhen removing and installing the optical system.

4) The middle frame contains the safety interlock switch.

Do not defeat the safety interlock by inserting wedges or other items into the switch slot.

LASER WAVE – LENGTH : 770 – 795nmPulse times : 10.24µsecOut put power : 0.15mW ± 0.01mW

CAUTIONINVISIBLE LASER RADIATION,

WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED.

AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.

VORSICHTUNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG,WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET UNDSICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG ÜBERBRÜCKT.NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.

VARO !AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUSOHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINANÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE ÄLÄKATSO SÄTEESEEN.

ADVARSELUSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING VED ÅBNING, NÅRSIKKERHEDSBRYDERE ER UDE AFFUNKTION. UNDGÅ UDSAETTELSE FORSTRÅLNING.

VARNING !OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DELÄR ÖPPNAD OCH SPÄRREN ÄR URKOPPLAD.BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN. – STRÅLEN ÄRFARLIG.

This product is a class 1 laser product that complies with 21CFR 1040 of the CDRH standard and IEC825. This means that this machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation. The use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

At the production line, the output powerof the scanner unit is adjusted to 0.57MILLI-WATT PLUS 20 PCTS and ismaintained constant by the operation ofthe Automatic Power Control (APC).Even if the APC circuit fails in operationfor some reason, the maximum outputpower will only be 15 MILLI-WATT 0.1MICRO-SEC. Giving and accessibleemission level of 42 MICRO-WATTwhich is still-less than the limit ofCLASS-1 laser product.

The foregoing is applicable only to the 220Vmodel, 230V model and 240V model.

VAROITUS! LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMINEN MUULLAKUIN TÄSSÄ KÄYTTÖOHJEESSA MAINITULLATAVALLA SAATTAA ALTISTAA KÄYTTÄJÄNTURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1 YLITTÄVÄLLENÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE.

VARNING - OM APPARATEN ANVÄNDS PÅ ANNATSÄTT ÄN I DENNA BRUKSANVISNINGSPECIFICERATS, KAN ANVÄNDAREN UTSÄTTASFÖR OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING, SOMÖVERSKRIDER GRÄNSEN FÖR LASERKLASS 1.

CautionThis product contains a low power laserdevice. To ensure continued safety do notremove any cover or attempt to gain accessto the inside of the product. Refer allservicing to qualified personnel.

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITEKLASS 1 LASER APPARAT

CONTENTS[1] GENERAL

1. Major functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12. Note for servicing and handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

[2] SPECIFICATIONS1. Basic Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12. Operation specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13. Copy performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24. SPLC printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35. Scan function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS1. Supply list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12. Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13. Production control number (lot No.) identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14. Toner cartridge replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

[4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES1. Appearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12. Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13. Operation panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24. Motors and solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35. Sensors and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46. PWB unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57. Cross sectional view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

[5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION1. Copier installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12. Cautions on handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13. Checking packed components and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14. Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25. Removing protective packing materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26. Developer unit installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27. Toner cartridge installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38. Loading the paper tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49. Power to copier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-410. Software for AR-M150/M155/M155X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

A. Before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5B. Installing the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5C. Setting up button manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10D. Connecting the machine to your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

11. Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12A. USB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12B. Parallel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

12. Moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

[6] COPY PROCESS1. Functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12. Outline of print process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23. Actual print process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

[7] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS1. Outline of operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12. Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

A. Scanner unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2B. Optical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2C. Drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

3. Laser unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3A. Basic structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3B. Laser beam path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3C. Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

4. Fuser section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3A. General description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

5. Paper feed section and paper transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4A. Paper transport path and general operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

6. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) mode paper/document transport (Duplex model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7A. Initial state. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7B. Front copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7C. Back copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

7. Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

[8] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY1. High voltage section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1B. Drum replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1C. Disassembly procedure (Transfer charger unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3D. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3E. Charger wire cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3F. Charger wire replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

2. Operation panel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

3. Optical section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

4. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

5. Tray paper feed/transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

6. Manual paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16D. Pressure plate holder attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

7. Rear frame section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

8. Power section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

9. Duplex motor section (Duplex model only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

10. Reverse roller section (Duplex model only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

[9] ADJUSTMENTS1. Optical section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

A. Copy magnification ratio adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1B. Image position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

2. Copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3A. Copy density adjustment timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3B. Note for copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3C. Necessary tool for copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4D. Features of copy density adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4E. Copy density adjustment procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

3. High voltage adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5A. Main charger (Grid bias) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5B. DV bias check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

4. Duplex adjustment (With optional RSPF installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5A. Adjusting the paper reverse position in memory for

duplex copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5B. Adjusting trailing edge void in duplex copy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

5. SPF (RSPF) scan position automatic adjustment (With optional SPF/RSPF installed). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

6. RSPF (SPF) mode sub scanning direction magnification ratio adjustment (With optional SPF/RSPF installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

7. Automatic black level correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

[10] TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES1. Entering the test command mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12. Key rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13. List of test commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14. Descriptions of various test commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35. Trouble codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

A. Trouble codes list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39B. Details of trouble codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

[11] MAINTENANCE1. Maintenance table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12. Maintenance display system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13. Remaining toner indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

[12] USER PROGRAM1. User programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

A. Copy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1B. Print mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

2. Selecting a setting for a user program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

A. Overall block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12. Circuit descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

A. Main PWB (MCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2B. DC power circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

[14] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM1. MCU PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12. OPERATION PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-263. POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-294. ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-33

[15] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES1. Initial setting (Serial number setting procedures) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12. Download procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13. Version acquisition procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-34. EEPROM data acquisition procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-45. Installing procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5

AR-M150/M155/M155X GENERAL 1 - 1

[1] GENERAL

1. Major functionsConfigurations

Descriptions of itemsCPM: Copy speed (Copies Per Minute)

SB/MB: SB = Manual feed single bypass, MB = Manual feed multi bypass

2 tray: Second cassette unit (AR-D16)

SPF: Original feed unit (AR-SP8)

R-SPF: Duplex original feed unit (AR-RP8)

Color scanner: Color scanner function

GDI printer: GDI printer function with USB

SPLC: SPLC printer function

E-SORT: Electrical sortDuplex: Auto duplex copy function

Shifter: Job separator function

FAX: FAX function (AR-FX9)

Sharpdesk: Scanner utilities

IEEE1284: Interface port (parallel)

USB: Interface port (USB)

RJ45: Interface port (Network)

External NIC: AR-NB2N

Descriptions of table: Standard provision: No function or no option availableOpt: Option

2. Note for servicing and handlingWhen the main unit power is repeatedly turned OFF/ON rapidly (for about 1sec), the IC (OA982) on the MCU PWB may malfunction to cause an error(E1-00 Communication error), which does not boot the machine. In case of this error, the blank display is kept for several tens seconds and then "E1-00" is displayed on the panel display.

<Countermeasure>Turn off the power and keep it for more than 10sec. Then turn on the power.

When the machine is booted.: There is no problem in the MCU PWB.

When the machine is not booted.: The MCU PWB trouble

Item CPM / PPM SB/

MB2

Tray SPF R-SPFColor

Scanner (push)

GDI printer SPLC E-SORT Duplex Shifter FAX Sharp

deskIEEE1284 USB RJ45 External

NICModel A4AR-M150 15 MB Opt Opt Opt

(2.0) Opt

AR-M155 15 MB Opt Opt Opt Opt

(2.0) Opt

AR-M155X 15 MB Opt Opt Opt

(2.0)

(AR-D16)(AR-SP8) (AR-RP8)

(AR-M150/M155/M155X)

[2] SPECIFICATIONS

1. Basic Specifications

2. Operation specifications

ItemType Desktop

Copy system Dry, electrostatic

Segment (class) Digital personal copier

Copier dimensions 20.4"(W) x 19.8"(D) x 11.7"(H) (518mm(W) x 503mm(D) x 296mm(H))Weight (Approximately) AR-M150 Approx. 36.6lbs. (16.6kg) TD and drum cartridges included

AR-M155/M155X Approx. 37.1lbs. (16.8kg)

Section, item Details

Paper feed section

Paper feed system 1 tray (250 sheets) + multi bypass (50 sheets)

AB system Tray paper feed section

Paper size A4, B5, A5

Paper weight 56 - 80g/m2 (15 - 21 lbs.)Paper feed capacity 250 sheets

Kinds Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper

Remark User adjustment of front paper guide available

Multi bypass paper feed section

Paper size A4, B5, A5, B6, A6 (Post card)

Paper weight 52 - 128g/m2 (14 - 34.5 lbs.)

Paper feed capacity 50 sheetsKinds Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, envelope,

OHP, Label (Single copy)

Remark User adjustment of side paper guide availableInch system Tray paper feed

sectionPaper size 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2 x 11", 8-1/2" x 5-1/2" (Landscape)

Paper weight 15 - 21 lbs.

Paper feed capacity 250 sheets

Kinds Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper

Remark User adjustment of front paper guide available

Multi bypass paper feed section

Paper size 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2 x 11", 8-1/2" x 5-1/2", 3-1/2" x 5-1/2" (Landscape)

Paper weight 14 - 34.5 lbs.

Paper feed capacity 50 sheetsKinds Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP, Label,

Envelop (Single copy)

Remark User adjustment of side paper guide available

Paper exit section Exit way Face downCapacity of output tray 200 sheets

Originals Original set Center Registration (left edge)

Max. original size A4 (8-1/2" x 14")

Original kinds sheet, book

Original size detection None

Optical section

Scanning section Scanning system 3 CCDs (RGB) sensor scanning by lighting white lampCCD sensor Resolution 600 dpi

Lighting lamp Type CCFL

Voltage 560Vrms

Power consumption 2.8W

Output data R, G, B 1 or 8 bits/pixel / A/D 16bit

Writing section Writing system Writing to OPC drum by the semiconductor laserLaser unit Resolution 600 dpi

Image forming Photoconductor type OPC (30ø)

Life 18k

Charger Charging system Saw -tooth charging with a grid, / (-) scorotron discharge

Transfer system (+) DC scorotron system

Separation system (-) DC scorotron systemDeveloping Developing system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development system

Cleaning Cleaning system Counter blade system (Counter to rotation)

AR-M150/M155/M155X SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 1

*1) May fluctuate due to environmental conditions and the input voltage.

3. Copy performance

∗ SPF/RSPF: OptionalDuplex: AR-M155/M155X

Fusing section Fusing system Heat roller system

Upper heat roller type Teflon rollerLower heat roller type Silicon rubber roller

Heater lamp type Halogen lamp

Voltage 230V

Power consumption 800W

Electrical section Power source Voltage 220 – 240V

Frequency 60HzRated current 8A

Power consumption Max. Less than 1000W

Average (during copying) 350 Wh/H *1)

Average (stand-by) 86Wh/H *1)

Pre-heat mode 25Wh/H *1)

Auto power shut-off mode 8.8Wh/H *1)


Copy magnification Fixed magnification ratios

4 Reduction + 3 Enlargement (AB system : 25, 50, 70, 86, 100, 141, 200, 400%) (Inch system : 25, 50, 64, 78, 100, 129, 200, 400%)

Zooming magnification ratios

OC: 25 - 400%, SPF/RSPF ∗: 50 - 200% (376 steps in 1% increments)

Manual steps (text, photo) 5 steps

Copy speed First copy time Tray paper feed 9.6 sec. (Pre-heat mode: 25 sec. / Auto power-shut-off mode: 40 sec.) A4 or Letter/100%/Auto Exposure

AB systemA4(Landscape)

Copy speed (CPM) Same size 15

Enlargement 15

Reduction 15

AB systemB5(Landscape)


Enlargement 15Reduction 15

Inch system8-1/2" x 14"(Landscape)


Enlargement 12

Reduction 12

Inch system8-1/2" x 11"(Landscape)


Enlargement 16

Reduction 16Max. continuous copy quantity 99

Void Void area leading edge 1 - 4mm

Trailing edge 4mm or less, 6mm or less (Duplex copying/both image)

Side void area 0.5mm or more (per side)4.5mm or less (total of both sides)

Image loss leading edge Same size: 3.0mm or less (OC) / 4.0mm or less (SPF/R-SPF/Duplex) ∗ Enlarge: 1.5mm or less (OC) / 3.0mm or less (SPF/R-SPF/Duplex) ∗ Reduction (50%): 6.0mm or less (OC) / 8.0mm or less (SPF/R-SPF/Duplex) ∗

Warm-up time 0 sec.Power save mode reset time 0 sec.

Paper jam recovery time 0 sec.



4. SPLC printer

*1: Engine Resolution

*2: Running change

5. Scan function

*1: Running change

∗ SPF/RSPF: OptionalDuplex: AR-M155/M155X

Print speed Max. 15ppm (A4 / with ROPM) / 16ppm (Letter / with ROPM)First print time 9.6 sec. (without data transfer time)

Duplex Yes (AR-M155/M155X)

ROPM Yes

CPU None

Memory Share the memory with E-SORT function

Interface IEEE1284 / USB 2.0Network External NIC (Optional)

Emulation SPLC (JBIG GDI)

MIB support Yes (with AR-NB2N)

Resolution 600dpi *1

Supported OS Win 95 / 98 / Me / NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP

WHQL support Yes *2Application Status window

Type Flat Bed Color Scanner

Scanning system Document glass / SPF / RSPF ∗Light source 3 CCDs (RGB) sensor scanning by lighting white lamp (2 pcs of CCFL)Resolution Optical: 600 x 1200dpi

Setting range: 50 - 9600dpi (Preview resolution is fixed at 75dpi)

Originals Sheet type / Book typeOutput data R, G, B 1 or 8 bits/pixel / A/D 16bit

Scan range OC / RSPF ∗: 8.5" (297mm) (L) x 14" (431mm) (W)Original position: Platen: Left center / SPF ∗: Right center

Scan speed OC / SPF ∗: Max. 2.88ms/line (Color/Gray scale), Max. 0.96 ms/line (B & W)

Protocol TWAIN / WIA (Only XP) / STI

Support file format RAW

Interface USB2.0

Scanner utility Button Manager / Sharpdesk (AR-M155X: No support)

Scan key/lamp YesDuplex scan Yes (with RSPF, TWAIN)

Supported OS Win 98 / Me / 2000 / XP

Void area No (User settable by PC)

WHQL supported Yes *1


[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS

1. Supply listA. Europe/SCA/SCNZ

Note: Printing of the master/individual cartons is made in 2 languages, English/French.Packed together with the machine: DR 25K/Developer UN/Process UN

2. EnvironmentalThe environmental conditions for assuring the copy quality and themachine operations are as follows:(1) Normal operating condition

Temperature: 20°C to 25Humidity: 65 ± 5%RH(2) Acceptable operating condition

(3) Transportation condition

(4) Supply storage condition

3. Production control number (lot No.) identification

<Toner cartridge>

∗: Destination code

No. Item Content Life Product name Package Remark1 Toner CA (Black)

(with IC chip)Toner (Toner: Net Weight 243g)

× 10 80K AR-152LT 1 ∗ Life setup is based on A46%.

LT=T ∗10Polyethylene bag × 10

2 Developer Developer (Developer: Net Weight 170g)

× 10 250K AR-152LD 1 LD=DV ∗10

3 Drum kit Drum × 1 25K AR-152DM 10Drum fixing plate × 1

Humidity (RH)

85%

60%

20%

10˚C 30˚C 35˚C

Humidity (RH)

90%

60%

15%

–25˚C 30˚C 40˚C

Classification No.

EX DestinationA packed with machine GB packed with machine H

Option DestinationA PB Q

Humidity (RH)

90%

20%

–5˚C 45˚C

Production month

Production day

Destination code ∗

(Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.)

Production place

(SOCC: Fixed to B.)

End digit of year

Version No.

AR-M150/M155/M155X CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 1

<Drum cartridge>

The label on the drum cartridge shows the date of production.(SOCC production)

(JAPAN production)

∗1 The production control label is not attached to the cartridge of aChina product.

<Developer>

4. Toner cartridge replacement1) Open the front and side cabinets of the copier.2) Keep holding Toner lever, and3) Carefully pull out Toner unit from the copier.

4) Put Toner unit in a collection bag immediately after removing itfrom the copier

Note: Never carry exposed Toner unit. Be sure to put it in thecollection bag.

Division No.Option 2Packed with machine 3

Production month

Production day

Destination code

(Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.)

Production place

(SOCC: Fixed to B.)

End digit of year

Version No.

X000119Ver.A 1

Production month

(1 - 9 = Jan. - Sep. 0 = Oct. X = Nov. Y = Dec.)

Serial number of month

Fixed to 1.

Pack division

(See table below)

End digit of year

Version No.

Production controllabel attachment position

Production controllabel attachment position(*1)

Sub lot

Production day

Production month

End digit of year

Production place

1

3

2

AR-M150/M155/M155X CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 2

[4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES

1. Appearance(With optional SPF/RSPF installed)

2. Internal(With optional SPF/RSPF installed)

1 Document glass 2 Operation panel 3 Front cover4 Paper tray 5 Side cover 6 Side cover open button

7 Bypass tray paper guides 8 Bypass tray 9 Reversing tray (RSPF only)

10 Original guides 11 Document feeder cover 12 Document feeder tray

13 Exit area 14 Document cover 15 Paper output tray

16 Paper output tray extension 17 Power switch 18 Handles

19 Power cord 20 USB connector 21 Parallel connector22 Paper holder arm

1 Front cover 2 Side cover 3 Fusing unit release lever

4 Transfer charger 5 Charger cleaner 6 Photoconductive drum

910

11

1213

2

3

4

1

5

76

8

14

SPF/RSPF (Option)

1615

19

22

Interface

1818

17

20

21

3

45

2

1

Toner cartridge

6

AR-M150/M155/M155X EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 1

3. Operation panel(AR-M150/M155 (Europe))

(AR-M155 (Australia)/M155X)

1 [MODE SELECT] key / Mode indicatorsPress this key to select the mode. The indicator of the selected mode lights (copy, printer, scanner, fax mode indicators).

2 DisplayThis shows messages indicating the machine status and any problems that occur, as well as user programs and function setting menus.

3 Numeric keysUse these to enter the number of copies and other numerical settings.The keys can also be used to select items in function setting menus.

4 [CLEAR] key ( )Use this to clear the set number of copies, as well as cancel a job that is in progress. When a setting menu appears, use this key to move back to the previous menu level.

5 Power save indicatorThis lights up when the power save function is activated.

6 SPF/RSPF indicator (Option)This lights up when an original is placed in the SPF/RSPF.

7 Error indicatorThis lights steadily or blinks when a paper misfeed or other error occurs.

8 [TRAY SELECT] key ( )Use to select the paper tray that has the desired paper for copying.

9 Tray location indicatorIndicates the selected paper tray. The indicator blinks when the tray is out of paper or is not closed.

10 [MENU] keyPress this key to select the paper size for copying, to configure a user program or to display the total count.

11 [2-SIDED COPY ] key (AR-M155/M155X)Press to select the automatic two-sided copying mode.

12 [E-SORT/SP.FUN ] keyPress to select the sort function, 2 IN 1 copy function, or margin shift function.

13 [ ] key ( ), [ ] key ( ), [OK (ENTER)] keyPress the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to select an item in a function setting menu.Press the [OK (ENTER)] key to enter a selection.

14 [EXPOSURE ] keyUse to switch from auto exposure adjustment to text mode or photo mode.

15 [ZOOM (COPY RATIO)] keyPress to select an enlargement or reduction ratio.To select a preset ratio setting, press the [ZOOM (COPY RATIO)] key and select the desired preset ratio. To select a ratio that is not preset, press the [ZOOM (COPY RATIO)] key, select the preset ratio that is closest to the desired ratio, and then press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to increase or decrease the ratio in increments of 1%.

16 [START] key ( ) / Ready indicatorThe ready indicator lights up when copying or scanning is possible.To begin copying, press the [START] key ( ).The [START] key ( ) is also pressed to return to normal operation from auto power shut-off mode.

17 [CLEAR ALL] key ( )This returns all functions to the default settings. When pressed in a setting menu, this returns the settings and display to the initial state.

18 Shows the current copy ratio.

19 Shows the selected paper size. 20 Shows the number of copies that has been entered with the numeric keys.

21 A checkmark " " appears when the exposure has been changed, or when two-sided copying, sort, 2 IN 1, or margin shift is selected.

AR-M155

6 7 8 9 1011 12 1314 15

1 2

1,2,3,1,2,3,

SP. FUNCZOOM

MENU OK

READY TO COPY. 100% A4 0

Display

16 1718 19 20 21

3 4 5

READY TO COPY. 100% 8.5x11 0

Display

AR-M155X

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1314 15 16 1718 19 20 21

1 2 3 4 5


4. Motors and solenoids(With optional SPF/RSPF installed)

No. Part name Control signal Function / Operation

1 Main motor MM Drives the copier.

2 Scanner motor MRMT Drives the optical mirror base (scanner unit).

3 Toner motor TM Supplies toner.

4 Cooling fan motor VFM Ventilate the fuser section.

5 Resist roller solenoid RRS Resist roller rotation control solenoid6 Paper feed solenoid CPFS1 Cassette Paper feed solenoid 1

7 Multi paper feed solenoid MPFS Multi manual pages feed solenoid

8 SPF motor SPFM Drives the single pass feeder

9 Duplex motor DMT Devices the duplex paper transport section (Duplex model only)

10 Original feed solenoid SPUS Original pick up solenoid

11 SPF paper feed solenoid SPFS Original feed solenoid (RSPF only)12 SPF gate solenoid SGS Controls the document reverse gate. (RSPF only)

13 Shifter motor SFTM Drives the shifter.

1

4

8

11

2

12

13

9

10

5

76

3


5. Sensors and switches(With optional SPF/RSPF installed)

No. Name Signal Type Function Output

1 Scanner unit home position sensor

MHPS Transmission sensor Scanner unit home position detection "H" at home position

2 POD sensor POD Transmission sensor Paper exit detection "H" at paper pass

3 PPD2 sensor PPD2 Transmission sensor Paper transport detection 2 "L" at paper pass

4 Cassette detection switch CED1 Micro-switch Cassette installation detection "H" at cassette insertion

5 PPD1 sensor PPD1 Transmission sensor Paper transport detection 1 "L" at paper pass6 Door switch DSW Micro-switch Door open/close detection

(safety switch for 24V)1 or 0V of 24V at door open

7 SPF sensor SPID/SD SW

Transmission sensor Paper entry detectionCover open/close detection

"L" at paper pass

8 SPPD sensor SPPD Transmission sensor Paper transport detection "L" at paper pass

9 PD1 sensor PD1 Micro-switch Paper width detect "H" at A4 size or less"L" at A4 size or more

1

8

7

2

3

4

5

9

6


6. PWB unit(With optional SPF/RSPF and FAX installed)

No. Name Function

1 Exposure lamp inverter PWB Exposure lamp (CCFL) control2 Main PWB (MCU) Copier control

3 Operation PWB Operation input/display

4 Power PWB AC power input, DC voltage control, High voltage control

5 CCD sensor PWB For image scanning

6 LSU motor PWB For polygon motor drive (In the LSU)

7 TCS PWB For toner sensor control8 LSU PWB For laser control (In the LSU)

9 FAX-operation PWB FAX operation input (AR-FX9 option)

10 Modem PWB FAX control (AR-FX9 option)

1

5 2

8

6

7

3

4

9

10


7. Cross sectional view(With optional RSPF installed)

No. Part name Function and operation

1 Scanner unit Illuminates the original with the copy lamp and passes the reflected light to the lens unit(CCD).

2 Exposure lamp Exposure lamp (CCFL) Illuminates original

3 LSU (Laser unit) Converts the original image signal into laser beams and writes onto the drum.4 Paper exit roller Roller for paper exit

5 Main charger Provides negative charges evenly to the drum surface.

6 Heat roller Fuses toner on the paper. (Teflon roller)

7 Pressure roller Fuses toner on the paper. (Silicon rubber roller)

8 Drum Forms images.

9 Transfer unit Transfers images onto the drum.10 Pickup roller Picks up the manual feed paper. (In multi feed only)

11 Manual paper feed tray Tray for manual feed paper

12 Manual paper feed roller Transport the paper from the manual paper feed port.

13 PS roller unit Takes synchronization between the lead edge and the rear edge of the paper.

14 Paper feed roller Picks up a sheet of paper from the cassette.

15 Pickup roller Picks up documents. (SPF/RSPF)16 Separation roller Separates documents to feed properly. (SPF/RSPF)

17 PS roller Feeds documents to the scanning section. (SPF/RSPF)

18 Paper exit roller Discharges documents. (SPF/RSPF)

1 4

3 5 18 15

6

7

8

9

10

111214 13

16 17

2


[5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION

1. Copier installationImproper installation may damage the copier. Please note the followingduring initial installation and whenever the copier is moved.

Caution: If the copier is moved from a cool place to a warm place, con-densation may form inside the copier. Operation in this condi-tion will cause poor copy quality and malfunctions.Leave the copier at room temperature for at least 2 hoursbefore use.

Do not install your copier in areas that are:

• damp, humid, or very dusty

• exposed to direct sunlight

• poorly ventilated

• subject to extreme temperature or humidity changes, e.g., near anair conditioner or heater.

The copier should be installed near an accessible power outlet for easyconnection.

Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that meetsthe specified voltage and current requirements.

Also make certain the outlet is properly grounded.

Be sure to allow the required space around the machine for servicingand proper ventilation.

2. Cautions on handlingBe careful in handling the copier as follows to maintain the perfor-mance of this copier.

Do not drop the copier, subject it to shock or strike it against anyobject.

Do not expose the drum cartridge to direct sunlight.

Doing so will damage the surface (green portion) of the drum cartridge,causing poor print quality.

Store spare supplies such as drum cartridges and TD cartridges in adark place without removing from the package before use.

If they are exposed to direct sunlight, poor print quality may result.

Do not touch the surface (green portion) of the drum cartridge.

Doing so will damage the surface of the cartridge, causing poor printquality.

3. Checking packed components and accessories

Open the carton and check if the following components and accesso-ries are included.

8"(20cm)8" (20cm)

4"(10cm)

4"(10cm)

Drum cartridge (installed in machine)

Software CD-ROM

• Operation manual

Power cord

AR-M150/M155/M155X UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 1

4. UnpackingBe sure to hold the handles on both sides of the machine to unpack themachine and carry it to the installation location.

5. Removing protective packing materials1) Remove all pieces of tape shown in the illustration below and then

open the SPF/RSPF and remove the protective materials. Take outthe bag containing the toner cartridge.

2) Release the scan head locking switch.

3) Open the bypass tray, and then open the side cover while pressingthe side cover open button.

4) Remove the CAUTION tape from the front cover and remove thetwo protective pins from the fusing machine by pulling the stringsupward one at a time.

6. Developer unit installation1) 2) 3) Open the side and front cabinets of the copier.

4) Remove the locking tape of the developer unit.

5) Remove the screw which is fixing the copier and Developer unit.

6) Remove Developer unit slowly from the copier.

7) Remove the screw (1 pc).

8) Remove Upper developer unit.Lock Unlock

Grasp here and turn in the direction of the arrow.

CAUTION tape

Protective pins

13

5

2

4


9) Shake the aluminum bag to stir developer

10) Supply developer from the aluminum bag to the top of the MXroller evenly.

Note: Be careful not to splash developer outside Developer unit.

11) Attach Upper developer unit and fix it with a screw.

12) Rotate the MG roller gear to distribute developer evenly.

Note: Never rotate the gear in the reverse direction.

Note: When carrying Developer unit, do not tilt it extremely asshown with the arrow in the figure below.(Prevention of splash of developer)

13) Insert Developer unit carefully into the copier.

Note: Quick insertion may result in splash of developer. Be sureto insert carefully.

14) Confirm that Developer unit is completely inserted to the bottom ofthe machine, fix Developer unit and the machine with a screw.

15) Completion of Developer unit installation

7. Toner cartridge installation1) To prevent against uneven distribution of toner, hold Toner unit with

both hands and shake it several times horizontally.

2) Hold the section of Toner unit shown in the figure below, removethe packing tape, and remove the cushion.

3) Pull out the cushion in the arrow direction.

4) Insert Toner unit carefully into the copier.

5) Insert until the hook is engaged with the copier as shown in the fig-ure below.

6) Pull out the shutter in the arrow direction.

Note: Do not hold and carry the shutter. Otherwise the shutter maydrop and Toner unit may drop.

7) Completion of Toner unit installationClose the front and side cabinets.


8. Loading the paper trayNote: Make sure that the paper is not torn, is free of dust, and has no

wrinkles or curled edges.

1) Raise the handle of the paper tray and pull the paper tray out until itstops.

2) Remove the pressure plate lock. Rotate the pressure plate lock inthe direction of the arrow to remove it while pressing down on thepressure plate of the paper tray.

3) Store the pressure plate lock which has been removed in step 2. Tostore the pressure plate lock, rotate the lock to secure it as shownbelow.

4) Squeeze the lock lever of the front guide and slide the front guide tomatch the width of the paper, and move the left guide to the appro-priate slot as marked on the tray.

• The front guide is a slide-type guide. Grasp the locking knob onthe guide and slide the guide to the indicator line of the paper tobe loaded.

• The left guide is an insert-type guide. Remove it and then insert itat the indicator line of the paper to be loaded.

5) Fan the paper and insert it into the tray. Make sure that the edgesgo under the corner hooks.

Note:

• Do not load paper above the maximum height line ( ).Exceeding the line will cause a paper misfeed.

• If the paper is not fanned, double-feeds or misfeeds may occur.

• Make sure the stack of paper is straight before loading it. When add-ing paper, take the remaining paper out and combine it into a singlestack with the new paper.

• Make sure that all the paper in the stack is the same size and type.

• When loading paper, ensure that there is no space between thepaper and the guide, and make sure that the guide is not set too nar-row and causes the paper to bend. Incorrect loading will cause thepaper to skew or misfeed.

6) Gently push the paper tray back into the machine.

Note:

• If you loaded a different size of paper than was loaded previously inthe tray.

• When not using the machine for an extended period, remove allpaper from the paper tray and store it in a dry place. If paper is left inthe machine for an extended period, the paper will absorb moisturefrom the air, resulting in paper jams.

9. Power to copier1) Ensure that the power switch of the copier is in the OFF position.

Insert the attached power cord into the power cord socket at therear of the copier.

2) Plug the other end of the power cord into the nearest outlet.

10. Software for AR-M150/M155/M155XThe CD-ROM that accompanies the machine contains the followingsoftware:

MFP driverPrinter driver

The printer driver enables you to use the printer function of themachine.

The printer driver includes the Print Status Window*. This is a utilitythat monitors the machine and informs you of the printing status, thename of the document currently being printed, and error messages.

* When the machine is connected through the parallel port, the PrintStatus Window can only be used when the parallel port is set to ECPmode. To set the parallel port mode, refer to your computer manualor ask the manufacturer of your computer.

Scanner driver (USB only)

The scanner driver allows you to use the scanning function of themachine with TWAIN-compliant and WIA-compliant applications.

Sharpdesk (AR-M155X: No support)Sharpdesk is an integrated software environment that makes it easy tomanage documents and image files, and launch applications.

Button ManagerButton Manager allows you to use the scanner menus on the machineto scan a document.

Note: The scanning feature can only be used with computers that arerunning Windows 98/Me/2000/XP and are connected to themachine by a USB cable. If you are running Windows 95/NT 4.0or are connected to the machine by a parallel connection, onlythe printer function can be used.

Pressure plate lock

Left guide

Front guide


A. Before Installation

(1) Hardware and software requirementsCheck the following hardware and software requirements in order toinstall the software.

*1 The machine's USB connector will transfer data at the speed speci-fied by the USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed) only if the Microsoft USB 2.0 driver ispreinstalled in the computer, or if the USB 2.0 driver for Windows2000 Professional/XP that Microsoft provides through its "WindowsUpdate" is installed.

*2 Compatible with Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Profes-sional, Windows XP Professional or Windows XP Home Edition pre-installed model standardly equipped with a USB port.

*3 Printing is not available in MS-DOS mode.

*4 The machine does not support printing from a Macintosh environ-ment.

*5 Administrator's rights are required to install the software using theinstaller.

(2) Installation environment and usable softwareThe following table shows the drivers and software that can beinstalled for each version of Windows and interface connectionmethod.

*1 Windows 98/Me does not support USB 2.0. A USB 2.0 connectioncan be used in Windows 98/Me, however, the performance will bethe same as USB 1.1. The print speed based on USB 2.0 specifica-tions can only be attained if your computer is running Windows2000/XP, you are using a cable that supports USB 2.0 (USB 1.1 orUSB 2.0 certified), and the cable is connected to a USB 2.0 port onyour computer. If the connection is made through a hub, the hubmust support USB 2.0.

*2 The printer driver that is installed will vary depending on the type ofconnection between the machine and your computer.

*3 Although it is possible to install Button Manager and Sharpdesk onWindows 98/Me/2000/XP, neither Button Manager nor the scannerfunction of Sharpdesk can actually be used.

B. Installing the softwareNote:

• If you need to use a different connection method after installing thesoftware based on a USB or parallel connection, you must first unin-stall the software and then install it using the new connectionmethod.

• In the following explanations it is assumed that the mouse is config-ured for right hand operation.

• The scanner feature only works when using a USB cable.

• If an error message appears, follow the instructions on the screen tosolve the problem. After the problem is solved, the installation proce-dure will continue. Depending on the problem, you may have to clickthe "Cancel" button to exit the installer. In this case, reinstall the soft-ware from the beginning after solving the problem.

[Standard installation (USB only)]The procedure for a standard installation of the software is explainedbelow. If the machine is connected by a USB cable, it is recommendedthat you use the standard installation.

Note: The standard installation can only be used when the machine isconnected by a USB cable. If the machine is connected by aparallel cable, use the custom installation procedure.

1) The USB cable must not be connected to the machine. Make surethat the cable is not connected before proceeding.

If the cable is connected, a Plug and Play window will appear. If thishappens, click the "Cancel" button to close the window and discon-nect the cable.

Note: The cable will be connected in step 9).

2) Insert the CD-ROM into your computer's CD-ROM drive.

3) Click the "start" button, click "My Computer", and then double-clickthe CD-ROM icon.

In Windows 98/Me/2000, double-click "My Computer", and thendouble-click the CD-ROM icon.

4) Double-click the "setup" icon.

Note: If the language selection screen appears after you double clickthe "setup" icon, select the language that you wish to use andclick the "Next" button. (Normally the correct language isselected automatically.)

5) The "SOFTWARE LICENSE" window will appear. Make sure thatyou understand the contents of the software license, and then clickthe "Yes" button.

6) Read the "Readme First" in the "Welcome" window and then clickthe "Next" button.

7) Click the "Standard" button.

"Integrated Installer is preparing..." will appear and then installationof the MFP driver, Button Manager, and Sharpdesk will begin auto-matically.

Follow the on-screen instructions.

Computer type IBM PC/AT or compatible computer equipped with a USB2.0*1/1.1*2 or bi-directional parallel interface (IEEE1284)

Operating system*3 *4

Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT Workstation 4.0 (ServicePack 5 or later)*5, Windows 2000 Professional*5, Windows XP Professional*5, Windows XP Home Edition*5

Display 800 x 600 dots (SVGA) display with 256 colors (or better)

Hard disk free space

150MB or more

Other hardware requirements

An environment on which any of the operating systems listed above can fully operate

CableOperating

system

MFP DriverButton

ManagerSharpdeskPrinter

driverScanner

driver

USB*1 Windows 98/Me/2000/XP

Available*2

Available

Parallel Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP

Not Available*3


8) When the "Finish" screen appears, click the "Close" button.

A message will appear instructing you to connect the machine toyour computer. Click the "OK" button.

Caution: If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning messageappears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature,be sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes".

Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart yourcomputer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" button torestart your computer.

9) Make sure that the power of the machine is turned on, and thenconnect the USB cable.

Windows will detect the machine and a Plug and Play screen willappear.

Caution: If the following message appears on your computer screen,close it.

A window regarding "HI-SPEED USB Device" will thenappear. Close the window.

This message appears when the machine's USB 2.0 mode isnot set to "HI-SPEED". For information on switching the USB2.0 mode.

10) Follow the instructions in the plug and play window to install theMFP driver.



Note: A "USB 2.0 Composite Device" installation window may appearprior to this procedure. In this case, follow the instructions in thewindow to install the USB 2.0 Composite Device.

This completes the installation of the MFP driver.

• If you installed Button Manager, set up Button Manager as explainedin "C. SETTING UP BUTTON MANAGER".

[Custom installation]The procedure for a custom installation of the software is explainedbelow. Use the custom installation procedure when the machine isconnected by a parallel cable, when the machine is used as a sharedprinter on a network, or when you wish to install the MFP driver, ButtonManager, or Sharpdesk separately.

(1) Windows XP (USB/Parallel)1) The USB/parallel cable must not be connected to the machine.

Make sure that the cable is not connected before proceeding.



2) Insert the CD-ROM into your computer's CD-ROM drive.

3) Click the "start" button, click "My Computer", and then double-clickthe CD-ROM icon.

In Windows 98/Me/2000, double-click "My Computer", and thendouble-click the CD-ROM icon.

4) Double-click the "setup" icon.

Note: If the language selection screen appears after you double clickthe "setup" icon, select the language that you wish to use andclick the "Next" button. (Normally the correct language isselected automatically.)

5) The "SOFTWARE LICENSE" window will appear. Make sure thatyou understand the contents of the software license, and then clickthe "Yes" button.

6) Read the "Readme First" in the "Welcome" window and then clickthe "Next" button.

7) Click the "Custom" button.

8) Click the "MFP Driver" button.

To view detailed information on the software, click the "DisplayReadme" button.

9) The "Welcome" window will appear. Click the "Next" button.

10) When you are asked how the printer is connected, select "Con-nected to this computer" and click the "Next" button.

If you are using the machine as a shared printer on a network,select "Connected via the network". For more information on thissetting, see "Using the machine as a shared printer".


Caution: If you are running Windows XP and a warning messageappears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature,be sure to click "Continue Anyway".


11) You will return to the window of step 8). If you wish to install But-ton Manager or Sharpdesk, click the "Utility Software" button.

If you do not wish to install the Utility Software, click the "Close"button and go to step 14).


Installing the Utility Software

12) Click the "Button Manager" button.



If you wish to install Sharpdesk, click the "Sharpdesk" button inthis window and follow the on-screen instructions.

Caution:

• Button Manager can only be used when the machine is connectedby a USB cable.

• The scanner function of Sharpdesk can only be used when themachine is connected by a USB cable.

Caution: If the following screen appears during installation of Sharp-desk, click the "Skip" button or the "Continue" button asappropriate to continue the Sharpdesk installation.

If "Skip" is selected, the Sharpdesk installation will continuewithout installing Sharpdesk imaging.

If "Continue" is selected, Sharpdesk Imaging will be installed.If Imaging for Windows is installed on your computer, Sharp-desk Imaging will overwrite Imaging for Windows.

13) When installation of Button Manager is finished, you will return tothe window of step 12). Click the "Close" button.



14) Make sure that the power of the machine is turned on, and thenconnect the USB/parallel cable.


Caution: If the following message appears on your computer screen,close it.

A window regarding "HI-SPEED USB Device" will thenappear. Close the window.

This message appears when the machine's USB 2.0 mode isnot set to "HI-SPEED". For information on switching the USB2.0 mode.



Caution: If you are running Windows XP and a warning messageappears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature,be sure to click "Continue Anyway".



• If you installed Button Manager, set up Button Manager as explainedin "C. Setting up button manager".

(2) Windows 98/Me/2000 (USB)1) The USB cable must not be connected to the machine. Make sure

that the cable is not connected before proceeding.



2) Perform steps 2) through 7) in "Custom installation".






6) When the interface selection screen appears, select "USB" andclick the "Next" button.



Caution: If you are running Windows 2000 and a warning messageappears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature,be sure to click "Yes".

7) You will return to the window of step 3). If you wish to install ButtonManager or Sharpdesk, click the "Utility Software" button.

To install the Utility Software, see "Installing the Utility Software"(steps 12) and 13) on page 7).

If you do not wish to install the Utility Software, click the "Close"button.



8) Make sure that the power of the machine is turned on, and thenconnect the USB cable.







• If you installed Button Manager, set up Button Manager as explainedin "C. Setting up button manager".

(3) Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000 (Parallel)1) The parallel cable must not be connected to the machine. Make

sure that the cable is not connected before proceeding.






Note: In Windows 95/NT4.0, the "Utility Software" button does notappear and only the printer driver can be installed.




6) When the interface selection screen appears, select "Parallel" andclick the "Next" button.


7) Select the printer port and whether the machine is to be used as thedefault printer, make the selections and click the "Next" button.

Select "LPT1" for the printer port.

Note:

• If "LPT1" does not appear, another printer or peripheral device isusing LPT1. In this case continue the installation, and after theinstallation is finished, change the port setting so that the machinecan use LPT1.

• The "Add Network port" button is used when the machine is used asa shared printer. Do not click this button here.

8) When the model selection window appears, select model name ofyour machine and click the "Next" button.



9) You will return to the window of step 3). If you wish to install Sharp-desk, click the "Utility Software" button.

To install the Utility Software, see "Installing the Utility Software"(steps 12) and 13) on page 7).

If you do not wish to install the Utility Software, click the "Close"button.


10) Make sure that the power of the machine is turned on, and thenconnect the parallel cable.


(4) Using the machine as a shared printerIf the machine will be used as a shared printer on a network, followthese steps to install the MFP driver in the client computer.

Note:

• To configure the appropriate settings in the print server, see theoperation manual or help file of your operating system."Print server" as explained here is a computer that is directly con-nected to the machine, and a "Client" is any other computer that isconnected to the same network.

• When the machine is used via a network connection, only the printerfunction can be used; the scanner function cannot be used.





4) When you are asked how the printer is connected, select "Con-nected via the network" and click the "Next" button.

5) When you are asked to select the printer port to be used, click the"Add Network Port" button.


6) Select the network printer that is shared and click the "OK" button.

Ask your network administrator for the server name and printername of the machine on the network.

7) In the printer port selection window, verify the network printer that isshared and whether the machine is to be used as the defaultprinter, make the selections and click the "Next" button.

8) When you are asked to select the model name, select the modelthat you are using and click the "Next" button.



9) You will return to the window of step 2). Click the "Close" button.



C. Setting up button managerButton Manager is a software program that works with the scannerdriver to enable scanning from the machine.

To scan using the machine, Button Manager must be linked with thescan menu on the machine. Follow the steps below to link Button Man-ager to scanner events.

(1) Windows XP1) Click the "start" button, click "Control Panel", click "Printers and

Other Hardware", and then click "Scanners and Cameras".

2) Click the "SHARP AR-XXXX" icon and select "Properties" from the"File" menu.

3) In the "Properties" screen, click the "Events" tab.

4) Select "SC1:" from the "Select an event" pull-down menu.

5) Select "Start this program" and then select "Sharp Button ManagerE" from the pull-down menu.

6) Click the "Apply" button.

7) Repeat Steps 4) through 6) to link Button Manager to "SC2:"through "SC6:".

Select "SC2:" from the "Select an event" pull-down menu. Select"Start this program", select "Sharp Button Manager E" from the pull-down menu, and then click the "Apply" button. Do the same foreach ScanMenu through "SC6:".

When the settings have been completed, click the "OK" button toclose the screen.

Button Manager is now linked to the scan menu (1 through 6).

The scan settings for each of scan menu 1 through 6 can be changedwith the setting window of Button Manager.

For the factory default settings of the scan menu and the proceduresfor configuring Button Manager settings.

(2) Windows 98/Me/20001) Click the "Start" button, select "Settings", and then click "Control

Panel".

2) Double-click the "Scanners and Cameras" icon.

Note: If the "Scanners and Cameras" icon does not appear inWindows Me, click "view all Control Panel options".

3) Select "SHARP AR-XXXX" and click the "Properties" button.

In Windows Me, right click "SHARP AR-XXXX" and click "Proper-ties" in the pop-up menu.

4) In the "Properties" screen, click the "Events" tab.


5) Select "SC1:" from the "Scanner events" pull-down menu.

6) Select "Sharp Button Manager E" in "Send to this application".

Note: If other applications are shown, deselect the checkboxes for theother applications and leave only the Button Manager checkboxselected.

7) Click the "Apply" button.

8) Repeat Steps 5) through 7) to link Button Manager to "SC2:"through "SC6:".

Select "SC2:" from the "Scanner events" pull-down menu. Select"Sharp Button Manager E" in "Send to this application" and click the"Apply" button. Do the same for each ScanMenu through "SC6:".

When the settings have been completed, click the "OK" button toclose the screen.

Button Manager is now linked to the scan menu (1 through 6).

The scan settings for each of scan menus 1 through 6 can be changedwith the setting window of Button Manager.

For the factory default settings of the scan menu and the proceduresfor configuring Button Manager settings.

D. Connecting the machine to your computer

(1) Connecting a USB cableFollow the procedure below to connect the machine to your computer.

A USB cable for connecting the machine to your computer is notincluded with the machine. Please purchase the appropriate cable foryour computer.

Caution:

• USB is available with a PC/AT compatible computer that was origi-nally equipped with USB and had Windows 98, Windows Me, Win-dows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Professional or Windows XPHome Edition preinstalled.

• Do not connect the USB cable before installing the MFP driver. TheUSB cable should be connected during installation of the MFPdriver.

Note:

• If the machine will be connected using a USB 2.0 port of your com-puter, please purchase a USB cable that supports USB 2.0.

• The machine's USB connector will transfer data at the speed speci-fied by the USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed) only if the Microsoft USB 2.0 driver ispreinstalled in the computer, or if the USB 2.0 driver for Windows2000 Professional/XP that Microsoft provides through its "WindowsUpdate" Web page is installed.

• To obtain the fastest USB 2.0 data transfer speed, "USB2.0 MODESWITCH" in the machine's user programs must be set to "HI-SPEED".

• Use the machine's "HI-SPEED" mode only when using a computerthat is running Windows 2000/XP.

• Even when the Microsoft USB 2.0 driver is used, it may not be possi-ble to obtain full USB 2.0 speed if a PC card supporting USB 2.0 isused. To obtain the latest driver (which may enable a higher speed),contact the manufacturer of your PC card.

• Connection is also possible using a USB 1.1 port on your computer.However, the specifications will be USB 1.1 specifications (Full-Speed).

1) Insert the cable into the USB connector on the machine.

2) Insert the other end of the cable into your computer's USB port.

(2) Connecting a parallel cable1) Obtain an IEEE1284 shielded parallel interface cable.

2) Insert the cable into the parallel interface connector located on therear of the unit, and fasten with clasps.

3) Insert the other end of the cable into the interface connector of yourcomputer.


11. Interface

A. USB

Connector4-pin ACON UBR23-4K2200

Type-B connector

CableShielded twisted pair cable

(2 m (6 feet) Max.: high-speed transmission equivalent)

Pin configurationThe pin numbers and signal names are listed in the following table.

B. Parallel interfaceThis printer uses a bi-directional parallel interface. Use the suppliedinterface cable.

Connector36-pin ACON RBE42-36K1153 female connector or equivalent con-nector

CableShielded type bi-directional parallel interface For best results, use aprinter interface cable which is IEEE1284 compliant.

Pin configurationThe pin numbers and signal names are listed in the following table.

12. Moving

Moving instructionsWhen moving the unit, follow the procedure below.

Note: When moving this unit, be sure to remove the TD cartridge inadvance.

1) Turn the power switch off and remove the power cord from the out-let.

2) Open the side cover and front cover, in that order. Remove the TDcartridge and close the front cover and side cover, in that order.

To open and close the side cover and front cover, and to removethe TD cartridge.

3) Raise the handle of the paper tray and pull the paper tray out until itstops.

4) Push the center of the pressure plate down until it locks in placeand lock the plate using the pressure plate lock which has beenstored in the front of the paper tray.

5) Push the paper tray back into the unit.

6) Lock the scan head locking switch.

Note: When shipping the unit, the scan head locking switch must belocked to prevent shipping damage.

7) Close the multi-bypass tray and the paper output tray extension,and attach the packing materials and tape which were removedduring installation of the unit.

8) Pack the unit into the carton.

Pin No. Signal name1 +5V

2 -DATA

3 +DATA

4 GND

12

3 4

118

36 19

Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name1 STB 19 GND (STB RET)2 DATA1 20 GND (DATA1 RET)3 DATA2 21 GND (DATA2 RET)4 DATA3 22 GND (DATA3 RET)5 DATA4 23 GND (DATA4 RET)6 DATA5 24 GND (DATA5 RET)7 DATA6 25 GND (DATA6 RET)8 DATA7 26 GND (DATA7 RET)9 DATA8 27 GND (DATA8 RET)

10 ACKNLG 28 GND (ACKNLG RET)

11 BUSY 29 GND (BUSY RET)12 PE (Paper End) 30 GND (PE RET)13 SLTC 31 INPRM14 AUTO LF 32 FAULT15 (NC) 33 (NC)16 GND (0 V) 34 (NC)17 FG 35 +5 V18 +5 V 36 SLTC IN


[6] COPY PROCESS

1. Functional diagram

(Basic operation cycle)

(20 microns thick)

Aluminum drum

Pigment layer (0.2to 0.3 microns thick)

An OPC drum is used for the photoconductor.(Structure of the OPC drum layers)

OPC layer

Main charger

Laser beam

MG roller

Cleaning blade

Drum

Transfer unit

Resist roller

ExposureMain high voltage unit

Saw tooth Charge

Drum

CleaningCleaning blade

Waste toner box

Paper release Fusing Separation

Heat roller

Heater lamp

Transfer

Transfer charger

Transfer highvoltage unit

Developing

Toner

Developer

Print process

Paper transport route

Semiconductor laser

Manual feed

PS roller

Focus correction lens

Electrode

Synchronizationwith drum

Cassettepaper feed

To facedown tray

AR-M150/M155/M155X COPY PROCESS 6 - 1

2. Outline of print processThis printer is a non-impact printer that uses a semiconductor laserand electrostatic print process. This printer uses an OPC (OrganicPhoto Conductor) for its photoconductive material.First, voltage from the main corona unit charges the drum surface anda latent image is formed on the drum surface using a laser beam. Thislatent image forms a visible image on the drum surface when toner isapplied. The toner image is then transferred onto the print paper by thetransfer corona and fused on the print paper in the fusing section witha combination of heat and pressure.

Step-1: ChargeStep-2: Exposure* Latent image is formed on the drum.Step-3: Developing

Latent image formed on the drum is then changed into visibleimage with toner.

Step-4: TransferThe visible image (toner image) on the drum is transferredonto the print paper.

Step-5: CleaningResidual toner on the drum surface is removed and collectedby the cleaning blade.

Step-6: Optical dischargeResidual charge on the drum surface is removed, bysemiconductor laser beam.

3. Actual print processStep-1: DC charge

A uniform negative charge is applied over the OPC drum surface bythe main charging unit. Stable potential is maintained by means of theScorotron charger. Positive charges are generated in the aluminum layer.

Step-2: Exposure (laser beam, lens)

A Laser beam is generated from the semiconductor laser andcontrolled by the print pattern signal. The laser writes onto the OPCdrum surface through the polygon mirrors and lens. The resistance ofthe OPC layer decreases for an area exposed by the laser beam(corresponding to the print pattern signal). The beam neutralizes thenegative charge. An electrostatic latent image is formed on the drumsurface.

AboutDC5.5KV

( 580V/ 400V)

OPC layerPigmentlayerAluminumdrum

OPC layerPigmentlayerAluminumlayer

Drum surface chargeafter the exposure

Non-image area Image area

Semiconductor laser

Exposure(semiconductor laser)


Step-3: Developing (DC bias)

A bias potential is applied to the MG roller in the two componentmagnetic brush developing method, and the toner is charged negativethrough friction with the carrier.Non-image area of the drum surface charged with negative potentialrepel the toner, whereas the laser exposed portions where no negativecharges exist, attract the toner. As a result, a visible image appears onthe drum surface.

Toner is attracted over the shadowed area because of the developingbias.

Step-4: Transfer

The visible image on the drum surface is transferred onto the printpaper by applying a positive charge from the transfer corona to thebackside of the print paper.

Step-5: Separation

Since the print paper is charged positively by the transfer corona, it isdischarged by the separation corona. The separation corona isconnected to ground.

Step-6: Cleaning

Toner remaining on the drum is removed and collected by the cleaningblade. It is transported to the waste toner collecting section in thecleaning unit by the waste toner transport roller.

S

N

N

:Carrier (Magnetized particle):Toner (Charge negative by friction)(N) (S) Permanent magnet

(provided in three locations)

MG roller

DC400V 8V

About DC 5.2kV


Step-7: Optical discharge (Semiconductor laser)

Before the drum rotation is stopped, the semiconductor laser isradiated onto the drum to reduce the electrical resistance in the OPClayer and eliminate residual charge, providing a uniform state to thedrum surface for the next page to be printed.When the electrical resistance is reduced, positive charges on thealuminum layer are moved and neutralized with negative charges onthe OPC layer.

Charge by the Scorotron charger

Function

The Scorotron charger functions to maintain uniform surface potentialon the drum at all times, It control the surface potential regardless ofthe charge characteristics of the photoconductor.

Basic function

A screen grid is placed between the saw tooth and thephotoconductor. A stable voltage is added to the screen grid tomaintain the corona current on the photoconductor.As the photoconductor is charged by the saw tooth from the maincorona unit, the surface potential increases. This increases the currentflowing through the screen grid. When the photoconductor potentialnears the grid potential, the current turns to flow to the grid so that thephotoconductor potential can be maintained at a stable level.

Process controlling

Function

The print pattern signal is converted into an invisible image by thesemiconductor laser using negative to positive (reversible) developingmethod. Therefore, if the developing bias is added before the drum ischarged, toner is attracted onto the drum. If the developing bias is notadded when the drum is charged, the carrier is attracted to the drumbecause of the strong electrostatic force of the drum.To avoid this, the process is controlled by adjusting the drum potentialand the grid potential of the Scorotron charger.

Basic function

Voltage added to the screen grid can be selected, high and low. Tomake it easily understood, the figure below shows voltage transition atthe developer unit.

Start

1) Because the grid potential is at a low level, the drum potential is atabout -400V. (Carrier may not be attracted though the carrier ispulled towards the drum by the electrostatic force of -400V.

2) Developing bias (-400V) is applied when the photoconductorpotential is switched from LOW to HIGH.

3) Once developing bias (-400V) is applied and the photo conductorpotential rises to HIGH, toner will not be attracted to the drum.

Stop

The reverse sequence takes place.Retaining developing bias at an abnormal occurrence

Function

The developing bias will be lost if the power supply was removedduring print process. In this event, the drum potential slightly abatesand the carrier makes deposits on the drum because of strong staticpower. To prevent this, the machine incorporates a function to retainthe developing bias for a certain period and decrease the voltagegradually against possible power loss.

Basic function

Normally, the developing bias voltage is retained for a certain timebefore the drum comes to a complete stop if the machine should stopbefore completing the normal print cycle. The developing bias can beadded before resuming the operation after an abnormal interruption.Therefore, carrier will not make a deposit on the drum surface.

Semiconductor laser

0START STOP

Print potential

Toner attractpotential

2)

3)

1) Low

4) High Drum potential

Developing bias

Time


[7] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS

1. Outline of operationThe outline of operation is described referring to the basic configuration.

(Basic configuration)

(Outline of copy operation)Setting conditions

1) Set copy conditions such as the copy quantity and the copy densitywith the operation section, and press the COPY button. The infor-mation on copy conditions is sent to the MCU.

Image scanning

2) When the COPY button is pressed, the scanner section startsscanning of images. The light from the copy lamp is reflected by the document andpassed through the lens to the CCD.

Photo signal/Electric signal conversion

3) The image is converted into electrical signals by the CCD circuitand passed to the MCU.

Image process

4) The document image signal sent from the CCD circuit is processedunder the revised conditions and sent to the LSU (laser unit) asprint data.

Electric signal/Photo signal (laser beam) conversion

5) The LSU emits laser beams according to the print data.(Electrical signals are converted into photo signals.)

6) The laser beams are radiated through the polygon mirror and vari-ous lenses to the OPC drum.

Printing

7) Electrostatic latent images are formed on the OPC drum accordingto the laser beams, and the latent images are developed to be visi-ble images(toner images).

8) Meanwhile the paper is fed to the image transfer section in syn-chronization with the image lead edge.

9) After the transfer of toner images onto the paper, the toner imagesare fused to the paper by the fusing section. The copied paper isdischarged onto the exit tray.

(Outline of printer operation)The print data sent from the PC are passed through the I/F and theMCU to the LSU. The procedures after that are the same as above 5)and later.

(Outline of scanner operation)The scan data are passed through the MCU and the I/F to the PCaccording to the conditions requested by the PC or set by the opera-tions with the operation panel.

Operationsection

Scanner section

CCD

MCU (Main control/image process section) Printer/Scanner I/F

USB

USB or parallelPC

Note: The scanner function is effectiveonly by USB connection.Network is for print only.

Laser beamPaper exit

Fusing section

Paper transport section

Manual paperfeed section

Cassette paperfeed section

Printer section

LSU (Laser unit)Laser diode, Polygon mirror lens

Process section

FAX modemFAX

(Option)

(Option)Network

FAX I/FNetworkBox

AR-M150/M155/M155X OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 1

2. Scanner sectionA. Scanner unitThe scanner unit in the digital copier scans images.

It is composed of the optical unit and the drive unit. The optical unitperforms scanning in the main scan direction with the light receivingelements (color CCD). The drive unit performs scanning in the subscanning direction by moving the optical unit.

B. Optical systemTwo white lamps are used as the light source.

Light radiated from the light source is applied to the document on thedocument table. The reflected light from the document is reflected 5times by No. 1 - No. 3 mirrors and passed through the reduction lens toform images on the light-receiving surface of 3-line CCD.

The light-receiving surface of the color CCD is provided with 3 linescanning sections for RGB. Separate images scanned in each colorsection are overlapped to complete color scanning. (When PC scan-ning)

The resolution is 600dpi.

When copying, only the green component is used to print with theprinter.

The color component for printing can be switched to red or blue by theservice test command.

(Spectrum characteristics of the lamp)

(Spectrum characteristics of the color CCD)

(Optical unit)

C. Drive systemThe drive system is composed of the scanner motor, the pulley gear,the idle pulley, the idle gear, the belt 473, the belt 190, and the shaft.

The motor rotation is converted into reciprocated movements of thebelt 473 through the idle gear, the pulley gear, the belt 190, and theidle pulley to drive the optical unit.

MBVM26W25W260NLH/G

0.00E+00

1.00E-01

2.00E-01

3.00E-01

4.00E-01

5.00E-01

6.00E-01

0 200 400 600 800Wave length (nm)

Inte

nsity

of U

V

Lamp : MBVM26W25W260NLH/GLamp current : 5mATemp. : 25 degree

1 Table glass 2 Optical unit 3 Lens4 Mirror 1 5 Mirror 2 6 Mirror 37 CCD PWB 8 Lamp 9 Reflector

1

98

10 8

9

7

35 4

2

6

1 Scanner motor 2 Pulley gear 3 Idle pulley4 Belt 473 5 Belt 190 6 Optical unit7 Shaft 8 Idle gear 9

7

3 4 6 2 8 5

1

3


3. Laser unitThe image data sent from the MCU (image process circuit) is sent tothe LSU (laser unit), where it is converted into laser beams.

A. Basic structureThe LSU unit is the writing section of the digital optical system.

The semiconductor laser is used as the light source, and images areformed on the OPC drum by the polygon mirror and fθ lens, etc.

The laser beams are passed through the collimator lens, the cylindricallens, the polygon mirror, the fθ lens, and the mirror to form images onthe OPC drum in the main scanning direction. The laser emitting PWBis provided with the APC (auto power control) in order to eliminate fluc-tuations in the laser power. The BD PWB works for measurement ofthe laser writing start point.

Makes the laser scanning speeds at both ends of the drum same aseach other.

B. Laser beam path

C. CompositionEffective scanning width: 216mm (max.)

Resolution: 600dpi

Beam diameter: 75um in the main scanning direction, 80um in the subscanning direction

Image surface power: 0.15 ±0.01mW (Laser wavelength 770 - 795nm)

Polygon motor section: Brushless motor 31,180rpmNo. of mirror surfaces: 4 surfaces

4. Fuser sectionNo Component Function1 Semiconductor laser Generates laser beams.2 Collimator lens Converges laser beams in parallel.3 CY lens Converges laser beams onto the

polygon mirror surface. 4 Polygon mirror,

polygon motorReflects laser beams at a constant rpm.(A four-surfaces polygon mirror is used.)

5 BD (Mirror, lens, PWB)

Detects start timing of laser scanning.

6 fθ lens Converges laser beams at a spot on the drum.Makes the laser scanning speeds at both ends of the drum same as each other. (Refer to the figure below.)

2

5

3

6

4 1

a ≠ b ≠ ca b c

d = e = fd e f

fθ LENS


A. General descriptionGeneral block diagram (cross section)

Top view

(1) Heat rollerA Teflon roller is used for the heat roller and a silicone rubber roller isused for the lower heat roller for better toner fusing performance andpaper separation.

(2) Separator pawlThree separator pawls are used on the upper heat roller. The separa-tor pawls are Teflon coated to reduce friction with the roller and preventa smear on the paper caused by the separator pawl.

(3) Thermal control1) The heater lamp, thermistor, main PWB, DC power supply PWB,

and triac within the power supply unit are used to control thetemperature in the fuser unit.To prevent against abnormally high temperature in the fuser unit, athermal breaker and thermal fuse are used for safety purposes.

2) The surface temperature of the upper heat roller is set to 165 -190°C. The surface temperature during the power save mode isset to 100°C.

3) The self-check function comes active when one of the followingmalfunctions occurs, and an "H" is displayed on the multicopywindow.

a. When the heat roller surface temperature rises above 240°C.

b. When the heat roller surface temperature drops below 100°C duringthe copy cycle.

c. Open thermistor

d. Open thermal fuse

e. When the heat roller temperature does not reach 190°C within 27second after supplying the power.

(4) Fusing resistorFusing resistor

This model is provided with a fusing resistor in the fusing section toimprove transfer efficiency.

Since the upper heat roller is conductive, when using copy paper thatcontains moisture and the distance between the transfer unit and thefusing unit is short, the transfer current may find a path to ground viathe copy paper, the upper heat roller and the discharging brush.

5. Paper feed section and paper transport section

A. Paper transport path and general operations

Paper feed is made in two ways; the tray paper feed and the manualpaper feed. The tray is of universal-type, and has the capacity of 250sheets.

The front loading system allows you to install or remove the tray fromthe front cabinet.

The general descriptions on the tray paper feed and the manual paperfeed operation are given below.

Separator pawl

PPD2

Thermal fuse

Thermistor

Heat roller

Paper guide

Pressure roller

Heat rollerThermistor

Thermal fuse

Heater lamp

Separator pawl

Safety device(thermal breaker, thermalfuse)

Triac (in thepower supply unit)

Heated by the heater lamp. (800W)

The surface temperatureof the upper heat roller issensed by the thermistor.

Level of the thermistor iscontrolled by the main PWB.

With the signal from themain PWB, the triac iscontrolled on and off.(power supply PWB)

1 Scanner unit 8 Drum

2 Copy lamp 9 Transfer unit

3 LSU (Laser unit) 10 Pickup roller4 Paper exit roller 11 Manual paper feed tray

5 Main charger 12 Manual paper feed roller

6 Heat roller 13 PS roller unit

7 Pressure roller 14 Paper feed roller

1

2534

6

78910

11121314


(1) Cassette paper feed operation1) The figure below shows the positions of the pick-up roller, the

paper feed clutch sleeve, and the paper feed latch in the initialstate without pressing the COPY button after lighting the readylamp.The paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the clutchsleeve.

2) When the COPY button is pressed, the main drive motor startsrotating to drive each drive gear.The pick-up drive gear also is driven at that time. Since, however,the paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the clutchsleeve, rotation of the drive gear is not transmitted to the pick-uproller, which does not rotate therefore.

3) After about 0.1 sec from when the main motor start rotating, thetray paper feed solenoid (PFS) turns on for a moment.This disengages the paper feed latch from the projection of theclutch sleeve, transmitting rotation of the pick-up drive gear to thepaper feed roller shaft, rotating the pick-up roller to feed the paper.

4) After more than half rotation of the pick-up roller, the paper feedlatch is brought in contact with a notch on the clutch sleeve,stopping rotation of the pick-up roller.

5) At this time, the paper is fed passed the paper entry detectionswitch (PPD1), and detected by it. After about 0.15 sec fromdetection of paper by PPD1, the tray paper feed solenoid (PFS)turns on so that the clutch sleeve projection comes into contactwith the paper feed latch to stop the pick-up roller. Then the pick-up roller rotates for about 0.15 sec so that the lead edge of thepaper is evenly pressed on the resist roller, preventing againstskew feeding.

6) To release the resist roller, the tray paper feed solenoid and theresist solenoid are turned on by the paper start signal to disengagethe resist start latch from the clutch sleeve, transmitting rotation ofthe resist drive gear to the resist roller shaft. Thus the paper istransported by the resist roller.

7) After the resist roller starts rotating, the paper is passed throughthe pre-transfer guide to the transfer section. Images aretransferred on the paper, which is separated from the OPC drumby the drum curve and the separation section.

8) The paper separated from the drum is passed through the fusingpaper guide, the heat roller (fusing section), POD (paper outdetector) to the copy tray.

OFF

PFS

OFF

RRS

OFF

PFS

OFF

RRS

ON

PFS

OFF

RRS

OFF

PFS

ON

RRS


(2) Manual multi paper feed operation1) Before paper feed operation, the manual paper feed solenoid

(MPFS) is turned OFF as shown in the figure below.

2) When the PRINT button is pressed, the manual paper feedsolenoid (MPFS) turns on to disengage the manual paper feedlatch.A from the manual paper feed clutch sleeve A, rotating the manualpaper feed roller and the manual take-up roller. At the same time,the manual paper feed stopper opens and the manual take-uproller is pressed to the surface of the paper to start paper feeding.

3) When pawl C of the manual paper feed clutch sleeve is engagedwith the manual feed latch, the manual feed stopper falls and themanual take-up roller rises. At that time, the manual paper feedroller is rotating.

4) The lead edge of the transported paper is pressed on the resistroller by the transport roller. Then the paper is stopped temporarilyto allow synchronization with the lead edge of the image on theOPC drum.From this point, the operation is the same as the paper feedoperation from the tray. (Refer to A-5 - 8.)

5) The solenoid turns off to close the gate and return to the initialstate.

OFMPFS

F

C A

ON

MPFS

A

C

ON

MPFS

A

C

OF

MPFS

F

A

C


(3) Conditions of occurrence of paper misfeeda. When the power is turned on:

PPD or POD is ON when the power is turned on.

b. Copy operation

6. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) mode paper/document transport (Duplex model)

A. Initial stateSet duplex documents on the document tray.

Set paper on the cassette. (In the duplex mode, the manual feed traycannot be selected.)

B. Front copyDocument transport:

The document feed roller feeds the document from the paper feedroller to the PS roller.

• The document is exposed in the exposure section, and sent to thedocument exit section

• by the transport/paper exit roller.

• R-SPF gate solenoid ON

• The document is sent to the intermediate tray.(but not discharged completely.)

• The document is stopped once, then switchback operation isperformed. (To the back copy)

Paper transport:

The document is passed through the paper feed roller and the PSroller by the paper feed roller

and the images on the front surface are transferred.

• The paper is passed through the fusing section and the lower side ofthe gate section to the paper exit tray side, (but not dischargedcompletely.)

• It is stopped once and switchback operation is performed.(To the back copy)

C. Back copyDocument transport:

By switchback operation, the document is sent through the PS roller tothe exposure section, where the back of the document is exposed.

• It is sent to the document exit section by the transport roller and thepaper exit roller.

• R-SPF gate solenoid ON. The document is sent to the intermediatetray, (but not discharged completely.)

• It is stopped once and switchback operation is performed.

• It is sent through the PS roller and the exposure section (withoutexposure operation) to the document exit section.

• R-SPF gate solenoid OFF

• The document is discharged to the document exit tray.

Paper transport:

Switchback operation is performed.

• The paper is sent through the upper side of the gate section and theduplex transport section, and the PS roller, and the images on theback are transferred.

• It is sent through the fusing section and discharged to the paper exittray.

a PPD1 jam PPD1 does not turn off within 4 sec after turning on the resist roller.

b PPD2 jam PPD2 is off immediately after turning on the resist roller.

PPD2 does not turn off within 1.2 sec after turning off the resist roller.

c POD jam POD does not turn on within 2.9 sec after turning on the resist roller.

POD does not turn off within 1.5 sec - 2.7 sec after turning off PPD2.


Switchback operation is made after back copying in order to dischargedocuments according to the setting.

Set document Documents after discharge,

There are following job modes as well as D-D mode.

S - S (Simplex to Simplex)

S - D (Simplex to Duplex),

Rotation copy mode (The back images are rotated 180°C.)

S - D (Simplex to Duplex), Copy mode without rotation

D - S (Duplex to Simplex)

Rotation copy mode:

The front and the back are in upside down each other.

Copy mode without rotation:

The front and the back are not in upside down.

7. Shifter

Shift width: 2.5cm

The offset function by the shifter is turned ON/OFF by the user pro-gram.

According to the setting, offset operation is performed for every job.(Default: ON)

1 with empty feed

4without empty feed

32 3 43 2 14 1 2


[8] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

The disassembly and assembly procedures are described for the fol-lowing sections:

1. High voltage section

2. Operation panel section

3. Optical section

4. Fusing section

5. Tray paper feed/transport section

6. Manual paper feed section

7. Rear frame section

8. Power section

9. Duplex motor section

10. Reverse roller section

1. High voltage sectionA. List

B. Drum replacement1) Remove the drum cover. (4 Lock Tabs)

2) Remove the drum fixing plate and the photoconductor drum.

(Note) Dispose the drum fixing plate which was removed.

3) Check the cleaning blade and the red felt for no damage.

• If there is any damage, execute all procedures from item 5) andlater.

• If there is no damage, execute the procedure of item 12).

4) Remove the main charger.(Cleaning the screen grid and the sawteeth.)

Before disassembly, be sure to disconnect the power cord for safety.

1. Do not disconnect or connect the connector and the har-ness during the machine is powered. Especially be carefulnot to disconnect or connect the harness between the MCUPWB and the LSU (MCU PWB: CN20) during the machine ispowered. (If it is disconnected or connected during themachine is powered, the IC inside the LSU will bedestroyed.)

2. To disconnect the harness after turning on the power, besure to turn off the power and wait for at least 10 sec beforedisconnection. (Note that a voltage still remains immedi-ately after turning off the power.)

No. Part name Ref.1 Drum2 Transfer charger unit3 Charger wire

(2)

(3)

LO CK

AR-M150/M155/M155X DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 1

5) Remove the cleaning blade.

Note: Dispose the cleaning blade which was removed.

6) Clean the cleaning section and the waste toner pipe to removewaste toner completely with a vacuum cleaner.

7) Remove the felt and duplex tape completely.

Note: Be careful not to scratch or bend the sub blade.

8) Attach the cleaning blade.

Securely insert the plate section of the cleaning blade into the unitand fix it with a screw.

Do not touch the cleaning blade rubber with your hand.

When attaching the cleaning blade, press the cleaning blade in thearrow direction and attach.

9) Attach the felt.

Attach the mocket with slightly pressing section A of the cleaningblade.

Do not touch the tip of the cleaning blade.

Do not put the mocket under the cleaning blade.

Do not put the mocket on the sub blade.

Do not press the sub blade with the mocket.

10) Attach the main charger.

Securely set the MC holder on the projection of the process frame.

Securely insert two projections of the MC holder into the groove inthe process frame.

When attaching the MC holder ass'y, be careful not to make con-tact with the cleaning blade.

11) Attach the drum fixing plate and the photoconductor drum.

Apply grease to the inside of the photoconductor drum. (Dia. 2)

Attach the drum from (b). (Prevention against the sub blade edgebreakage)

Attach the drum so that its position with the sub blade is as shown.

0 – 0.3 mm 0 – 0.3 mm

0 – 0.5 mm0 – 0.5 mm

0.2

– 0.

5 m

m

0.2

– 0.

5 m

m

Cleaning blade

Cleaning blade

Moquette R

Sub blade

Sub blade

Moquette F

Moquette RMoquette F

∗ ∗

∗: Check while pressing the blade.

Be careful not to allow the moquette to cover the sub blade.

Example of NG


12) Attach the detection gear.

Note:

• The detection gear is not installed to the drum cartridge packedwith the main body. Add a new one.

13) Attach the drum cover.

Note: After attaching the drum cover, do not make a copy.When attaching the drum cover, engage the detection gear20T rib with the 30T gear rib, and attach the drum cover tothe process frame.

C. Disassembly procedure (Transfer charger unit)1) Press the side cover open/close button and open the side cover.

2) Push up the lock pawls (2 positions) of the side cover, and removethe transfer charger.

D. Assembly procedureFor assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.

E. Charger wire cleaning1) Remove the charger cleaner from the manual paper feed unit.

1)

2)

2)

1)

1)

Lock pawl rear

Lock pawl rear

Transfercharger

1)


2) Set the charger cleaner to the transfer unit, and move it recipro-cally a few times in the direction of the arrow shown in the figurebelow.

F. Charger wire replacement1) Remove the TC cover and remove the screw.

2) Remove the spring and remove the charger wire.

3) Install a new charger wire by reversing the procedures (1) and (2).At that time, be careful of the following items.

• The rest of the charger wire must be within 1.5mm. Refer to Fig.1

• The spring hook section (charger wire winding section) must be inthe range of the projection section.

• Be careful not to twist the charger wire.

2. Operation panel sectionA. List

B. Disassembly procedure1) Open the side door, and Open the front cover.

2) Remove the screws (4 pcs.), the harness, and the operation panelunit.

1)

2)

3)4)

1mm

1.5mm

Fig.1

1)

1)

2)

3)

Charger wire

Protrusion

No. Part name Ref.

1 Operation panel unit2 Operation PWB

1)

2)

1)

1)

1)

1)

2)

3)


3) Remove four screws, and remove the operation cabinet.

4) Remove four screws, and remove the operation PWB.

C. Assembly procedureFor assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure

3. Optical sectionA. List

B. Disassembly procedure1) Remove four screws, and remove the rear cabinet and the rear

cabinet cover.

2) Remove the four screws, remove the operation unit, and discon-nect the connector.

3) Remove the right cabinet.

4) Remove the left cabinet.

5) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cover.

6) Remove the table glass.

7) Move the carriage to the position indicated on the figure.

8) Loosen the screw which is fixing the tension plate.

9) Move the tension plate in the arrow direction to release the ten-sion, and remove the belt.

NO. Part name Ref.1 Copy lamp unit

2 Copy lamp

3 Lens unit

1)

1)

1)4)

1)

3)

3)

2)

Note that there are 9 pawls

1)

1)

1)1)

2)

2)

1)

1)

2)

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

1)

1)

3)

1)

2) 4)

3)


10) Remove the screw, and remove the rod stopper.

11) Remove the rod.

12) Lift the rear side of the carriage, remove the belt and the connec-tor, and remove the carriage.

C. Assembly procedure

CCD core1) Pass the core through the CCD-MCU harness.

2) Insert the CCD-MCU harness into the CCD PWB connector of thecarriage unit.

3) Move the core which was passed through the CCD-MCU harnessnear the CCD PWB connector as shown in the figure below, and fixit with a filament tape (19mm wide, 40mm long). For the attach-ment reference, refer to the figure below. Clean and remove oilfrom the attachment section.

4) Attach the CCD-MCU harness to the duplex tape on the back ofthe carriage unit.

5) Attach the PWB holder to the position specified in the figure below.

6) Pass the core through the FFC and the PWB holder, and fix thecore.

1)2)

3)

1)

2)

4)

3)

Note: Attach the FCC to the base plate securely with duplex tape to prevent against coming loose.

Note: Attach the FCC to fit with the marking line. Marking line.


4. Fusing sectionA. List

B. Disassembly procedure1) Remove the connectors (3 pcs.) of the rear cabinet.

2) Open the side cover, remove two screws, and remove the fusingunit.

3) Cut the binding band, remove the screw, and remove the ther-mistor.

4) Remove the screw and remove the U-turn guide.

Pressure roller section disassembly5) Remove the three screws, remove the fusing cover lower on the

right side, and open the heat roller section.

6) Remove the screw and remove the PPD2 sensor.

No. Part name Ref.

1 Thermistor2 PPD2 sensor

3 Heater lamp

4 Pressure roller

5 Heat roller

1)

2)

3)

2)

1)

2)

3)Thermistor

1)

2)

1)

5)

5)

6)

6)

4)3)2)

1)

2)PPD2 sensor


7) Remove the plate spring on the right and remove the heater lamp.

8) Remove the spring and remove the separation pawls (3 pcs.).

9) Remove the E-ring and remove the reverse gate.

10) Remove the pressure release levers on the right and the left sides.

11) Remove the pressure roller, the pressure bearing, and the spring.

Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with an asterisk (*).Grease: “JFE552” UKOG-0235FCZZ

Heat roller disassembly

(Continued from procedure (4).)

5) Remove screws, remove the fusing cover, and open the heat rollersection.

1)

2)

Heater lamp

3)

1)

2)

2)

1)

3)

1)

1)

1)

2)

2)

1)

3)

3)

Pressure roller

1)

2)

2)

3)

3)


6) Remove the C-ring and the fusing bearing, and remove the heatroller.

7) Remove the parts from the heat roller.

Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with ∗1.Grease: “JFE552” UKOG-0235FCZZ

8) Remove two screws and remove the thermo unit.

C. Assembly procedureFor assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.

5. Tray paper feed/transport sectionA. List

B. Disassembly procedure1) Remove the paper holding arm.

Remove the arm holder from the main unit, and remove the holderfrom the arm.

2) Remove the two screws, and remove the hinge guide R.

3) Remove the fan duct and disconnect the connector. (2 positions)

4) Remove the six screws, and remove the scanner unit.

1)2) 3) Heat roller

3)2)

1)

1

1

2

Apply grease "GU-2" (UKOG-0255FCZZ) to the fusing gear surface ∗2.

1)

2)

3)

No. Part name Ref.

1 Paper holding arm2 PPD1 sensor PWB

3 LSU unit

4 Intermediate frame unit

5 Paper feed roller

3)

1)

2)

2)

4)

5)5)

5) 5)

5)

2)

1)

6)3)

4)

4)

1)

5)


5) Disconnect the connector from the MCU PWB.

6) Disengage the pawls (2 positions), and remove the sensor PWB.

7) Remove the screw, and open the upper paper guide.

8) Remove the roller, and remove the belt.

9) Disengage the pawl, and remove the roller knob.

10) Disengage the pawl, and shift the pulley and the bearing.

11) Remove the paper exit roller, and remove the belt, the pulley, andthe bearing.

12) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the speakerunit. (When the AR-FX9 is installed)

1)

2)

3)

1)1)

2)

1)

2)

1)

2)3)

4)

1)2)

2)

1)

3)


13) Remove the flat cable and the grounding wire.

14) Remove the four screws, and remove the FAX PWB unit. (Whenthe AR-FX9 is installed)

15) Disconnect the connectors.

16) Remove the three screws, and remove the MCU PWB.

17) Remove two screws and remove the toner motor.

18) Remove the three screws, and remove the DUP motor unit and thebelt.

19) Remove the harness guide.

20) Remove the five screws and the grounding wire, and remove themain drive unit.

2)

1)

3)

3)

4)

3)

3)

1)

1)

1)

2)

2)

2)

3)

1)

2)

1)

1)

2) 3)

1)

2)

1)

1)

1)

CAUTION:Attach the gears securely


21) Remove the parts as shown below, and remove the pressurerelease solenoid and the paper feed solenoid.

22) Remove each pawl, and remove the paper exit tray.

23) Remove two screws and remove the fusing connector.

24) Remove five screws and the connector, and lift the intermediateframe unit to remove.

25) Remove the four screws, and remove the lower paper guide unit.

[Note for installation]

Fit the lower paper guide hole (a) with the shifter gear hole (b) sothat the black resin (c) of the shifter unit can be checked.

3)

3)

1)

1)

2)

2)

4)

4)

2)4)

1)

3)

2)

2)

3)

3)

3)

3)

1)

4)

1)

1)1)1)

2)

abc


26) Disengage the pawl, and remove the pulley.

27) Shift and remove the shifter unit.

28) Remove the screw, and remove the grounding plate and the gear.

29) Remove the E-ring, the gear, and the bearing, and remove theshifter roller.

30) Put the lower paper guide unit upside down, remove the twoscrews, and remove the shifter motor.

31) Remove the four screws, and remove the LSU.

Note: When assembling, turn it to the right and attach.

1)

2)

3)

3)

4)

1)

2)

3)

1)

2)

1)

1)

1)

2)


32) Remove the screw and the E-ring, and remove the PS semi-circu-lar earth plate and the PS roller unit.

33) Remove the E-ring and remove the spring clutch from the PS rollerunit.

34) Remove three screws and remove the TC front paper guide.

35) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the PPD1 sen-sor PWB.

36) Remove two E-rings and remove the paper feed roller.

37) Remove three E-rings and remove the clutch unit.

38) Remove the semi-circular roller unit.

39) Remove the semi-circular rubber.


5)

4)

4)

1)

2)

3)

PS roller unit

PS semi-circulerearth plate

5)

4)

4)

1)

2)

3)

PS semi-circularearth plate

Use grease of Floil FG40H only to apply to this section.

1)

2)

1)

2)

4)

5)

1)

2)

3)

4)

Back

Front

Clutch unit

Paper feedroller

2)

1)1)


6. Manual paper feed sectionA. List

B. Disassembly procedure

Multi unit1) Remove the screw and remove the multi upper cover.

2) Remove the screw and remove the side door detection unit.

3) Remove three screws and remove the multi paper feed upperframe.

4) Remove two screws and remove the multi feed bracket unit fromthe multi paper feed upper frame.

No. Part name Ref.

1 Manual transport roller2 Cassette detection switch

3 PPD1 sensor PWB

4 Side door detection unit

2)

1)

1)

2)

Back Wire treatment

1)

2)

1)

2)

2)

1) 1)


5) Remove three E-rings and remove the manual paper feed rollerB9.

6) Remove the pick-up roller.

7) Cut the binding band and remove the multi paper feed solenoid.


D. Pressure plate holder attachment1) Attach the pressure plate holder so that the resin section is not

covered with the seal M1-N.

2)

1) 1)

1)

3)

L O C K

TO

K

2)

1)

1)

2)3)Multi paper feedsolenoid

Pressure plateholder

Seal M1-N

Attachmentreference

Attachmentreference


7. Rear frame sectionA. List

B. Disassembly procedure1) Remove the rear cabinet.

2) Remove the connector, the flat cable, and the grounding wire.

3) Remove three screws, and remove the FAX PWB.

4) Disconnect the connector.

5) Remove two screws, and remove the scanner motor.

6) Remove two screws and one harness, and remove the mainmotor.

7) Remove two screws and one connector, and remove the exhaustfan motor.

Note: Be careful of the installing directions of the fan.Attach it so that the blowing direction faces outside.

8) Disconnect the connectors.

9) Remove the five screws, and remove the MCU PWB.


No. Part name Ref.1 FAX PWB (When the AR-FX9 installed)2 Mirror motor3 Main motor4 Exhaust fan motor5 Main PWB

2)2)

1)

1)

3)2)

2)

1)

3)

2)

1)

2)

3)

1)

2)

3)

Blowing direction

1)

1)

1)

2)

3)

2)

2)

2)

2)


8. Power sectionA. List

B. Disassembly procedure1) Disconnect each connector.

2) Remove the screw, and remove the earth line.

3) Remove two screws, and remove the power PWB unit.


9. Duplex motor section (Duplex model only)

A. List

B. Disassembly procedure1) Remove the rear cabinet.

2) Remove two screws.

3) Remove the Duplex motor cover.

4) Remove the Duplex motor.

Note: When reassembling, be sure to engage the Duplex motor gearwith the belt on the main body side.


10.Reverse roller section (Duplex model only)

A. List

B. Disassembly procedure1) Remove four screws

2) Remove the spring, and the earth wire

3) Remove the reverse unit.

4) Bend the reverse roller and remove it.


No. Part name Ref.

1 Power PWB

No. Part name Ref.

1 Duplex motor

1) 1)1)

1)

2)

3)

4)

4)5)

1)

12

3

1

No. Part name Ref.

1 Reverse roller

1

2

3

1


[9] ADJUSTMENTS

1. Optical section

A. Copy magnification ratio adjustmentThe copy magnification ratio must be adjusted in the main scanningdirection and in the sub scanning direction. To adjust, use TC 48-01.

(1) OutlineThe main scanning (front/rear) direction magnification ratio adjustmentis made manually.

The adjustment is made by manual key operations. (The zoom dataregister set value is changed for adjustment.)

The magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is adjusted bychanging the carriage (scanner) scanning speed.

(2) Main scanning/sub scanning direction magnification ratio adjustment

a. Cases when the adjustment is required

1) When the main PWB is replaced.

2) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced.

3) When "U2" trouble occurs.

4) When repairing or replacing the optical section.

b. Necessary tools

• Scale

c. Main scanning direction adjustment procedure

1) Set the scale vertically on the document table. (Use a long scalefor precise adjustment.)

2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%.

3) Make a copy on A4 or 81/2" x 11" paper.

4) Measure the length of the copied scale image.

5) Calculate the main scanning direction magnification ratio. Main scanning direction magnification ratio

6) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specifiedrange. If it is not within the specified range, perform the followingprocedures.

7) Execute TC 48-01 to select the main scanning direction copymagnification ratio adjustment mode.To select the adjustment mode, use the [←/→] key.

8) Enter the new set value of main scanning direction copymagnification ratio with the copy quantity set key, and press the[START] key.

9) Change the set value and repeat the adjustment until the ratio iswithin the specified range.When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ratio ischanged by 0.1%.

d. Sub scanning direction adjustment procedure

1) Set the scale on the document table as shown below. (Use a longscale for precise adjustment.)

=Copy image dimensions

X 100 (%)Original dimension

ModeDisplay

itemDefault value

LED

Main scan direction magnification ratio

F-R 50 PRINT mode lamp

OC mode sub scan direction magnification ratio

SCAN 50 SCAN mode lamp

100 110 120 130 150140mm1/2mm

JAPAN

HARDENEDSTAINLESS

Shizuoka

100 110 120 130 150140mm1/2mm

JAPAN

HARDENEDSTAINLESS

Shizuoka

110

10 20

10 20

(When a 100mm scale is used as the original.)

Paper feeddirection

Reference Comparison point

Original (Scale)

Copy

AR-M150/M155/M155X ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 1

2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%.

3) Make a copy on A4 or 81/2" x 11" paper.

4) Measure the length of the copied scale image.

5) Calculate the sub scanning direction copy magnification ratiousing the formula below.

6) Check that the actual copy magnification ratio is within thespecified range. (100 ± 1.0%).If it is not within the specified range, perform the followingprocedures.

7) Execute TC 48-01 to select the sub scanning direction copymagnification ratio adjustment mode.To select the adjustment mode, use the [←/→] key. (SCAN modelamp ON)

8) Enter the new set value of sub scanning direction copymagnification ratio with the copy quantity set key, and press the[START] key.

Repeat procedures 1) - 8) until the sub scanning direction actual copymagnification ratio in 100% copying is within the specified range.

When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ration ischanged by 0.1%.

B. Image position adjustmentThe employed test commands and the contents are as follows:

The modes can be selected by pressing [←/→] key.

(*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models,skip.

* In the 2nd print center offset adjustment, print is made forcibly as1to2/Long Edge from OC regardless of duplex setting.

(1) Lead edge adjustment1) Set a scale to the center of the paper lead edge guide as shown

below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2" x 14" paper or OC cover.

2) Execute TC 50 - 01

3) Set the print start position (A: COPY mode lamp ON), the leadedge void amount (B: PRINT mode lamp ON), the scan start posi-tion (C: SCAN mode lamp) to 1, and make a copy of the scale at100%.

4) Measure the image loss (Rmm) of the scale.

Set C = 10 x R (mm). (Example: Set to 40.)

When the value of C is increased by 10, the image loss isdecreased by 1mm. (Default: 50)

5) Measure the distance (Hmm) from the paper lead edge to theimage print start position.

Set A = 10 x H (mm). (Example: Set to 50.)

When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead edge ismoved to the paper lead edge by 1mm. (Default: 50).

6) Set the lead edge void amount to B = 50 (2.5mm). (Default: 50)

When the value of B is increased by 10, the void is extended byabout 0.1mm. (For 25 or less, however, the void amount isregarded as 0.)

* The SFP adjustment is made by adjusting the SPF image scan startposition after OC adjustment.

=Copy image dimensions

X 100 (%)Original dimension

ModeDisplay

itemDefault LED TC

Print start position (Main cassette paper feed)

TRAY1 50 COPY mode lampMain cassette lamp

50-01

(*) Print start position (2nd cassette paper feed)

TRAY2 50 COPY mode lamp2nd cassette lamp

Print start position (Manual paper feed)

MFT 50 COPY mode lampManual feed lamp

Image lead edge void amount

DEN-A 50 PRINT mode lamp

Image scan start position

RRC-A 50 SCAN mode lamp

Image rear edge void amount

DEN-B 50 COPY mode lampPRINT mode lampSCAN mode lamp

100 110 120 130 150140mm1/2mm

JAPAN

HARDDENCDSTAINLESS

Shizuoka

100 110 120 130 150140mm1/2mm

JAPAN

HARDDENCDSTAINLESS

Shizuoka

110

10 20

10 20

Original (Scale)

Paper feeddirection

Reference Comparison point Copy

ModeDisplay

itemDefault LED TC

Print center offset (Main cassette paper feed)


50-10

(*) Print center offset (2nd cassette paper feed)


Print center offset (Manual paper feed)


2nd print center offset (Main cassette paper feed)

SIDE2 50 PRINT mode lampMain cassette lamp


(Example)

(2) Image rear edge void amount adjustment1) Set a scale to the rear edge section of A4 or 11" x 8 1/2" paper size

as shown in the figure below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2" x 14"paper.

2) Execute TC 50 - 01 to select the image rear edge void amountadjustment mode.The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display.

3) Make a copy and measure the void amount of image rear edge.

4) If the measurement value is out of the specified range, change theset value and repeat the adjustment procedure.The default value is 50.

(3) Center offset adjustment1) Set the self-made test chart for the center position adjustment so

that its center line is aligned with the center mark of the documentguide.

• Test chart for the center position adjustment.Draw a line at the center of A4 or 8 1/2" x 11" paper in the papertransport direction.

2) Execute TC 50-10 to select the print center offset (cassette paperfeed) adjustment mode.The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display.

3) Make a copy and check that the copied center line is properlypositioned.The standard value is 0 ±2mm from the paper center.

4) If the measured value is out of the specified range, change the setvalue and repeat the adjustment procedure.When the set value is increased by 1, the copy image is shifted by0.1mm toward the rear frame.

• For the manual paper feed, change the manual paper feedadjustment mode and perform the similar procedures.

• Since the document center offset is automatically adjusted by theCCD which scan the reference lines (F/R) on the back of documentguide, there is no need to adjust manually.

2. Copy density adjustment

A. Copy density adjustment timingThe copy density adjustment must be performed in the following cases:

• When maintenance is performed.

• When the developing bias/grid bias voltage is adjusted.

• When the optical section is cleaned.

• When a part in the optical section is replaced.

• When the optical section is disassembled.

• When the OPC drum is replaced.

• When the main control PWB is replaced.

• When the EEPROM on the main control PWB is replaced.

• When the memory trouble (U2) occurs.

B. Note for copy density adjustment1) Arrangement before execution of the copy density adjustment

• Clean the optical section.

• Clean or replace the charger wire.

• Check that the voltage at the high voltage section and thedeveloping bias voltage are in the specified range.

5mm

10mm

Distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge, H = 5mm

Image loss, R = 4mm

B4 or 8 1/2″ × 14″ paper

A4 size rear edge

Scale image

Paper rear edge

Void amount (Standard value: 2 - 3mm)

Document guide

(Copy A)

(Copy B)

2.0mm or less

2.0mm or less

Copy image

Copy paperfolding line

Copy image

Copy paperfolding line

Shift

Shift

(Paper feed direction)


C. Necessary tool for copy density adjustment• One of the following test charts:

UKOG-0162FCZZ, UKOG-0089CSZZ, KODAK GRAY SCALE

• B4 (14" x 8 1/2") white paper

• The user program AE setting should be "3."

Test chart comparison table

D. Features of copy density adjustmentFor the copy density adjustment, the image data shift function providedin the image process LSI is used.

List of the adjustment modes

E. Copy density adjustment procedureThe copy density can be adjusted in 300dpi or in 600dpi.

For selection of modes, use the copy mode select key.

(1) Test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) setting1) Place the test chart so that its edge is aligned with the A4 (Letter)

reference line on the document table. Then place a A4 (14" x 8 1/2") white paper on the test chart and close the document cover.

(2) Perform the adjustment in each mode.1) Execute TC 46-01 (300dpi). To adjust in 600dpi, execute TC 46-

02.

2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the exposure mode select key.Set the exposure level to 3 (center) for all adjustment. (Except forthe auto mode.)

(AR-M150/M155 (Europe))

(AR-M155 (Australia)/M155X)

3) Make a copy.Check the adjustment level (shown in the above table) of theexposure test chart (Sharp Gray Scale).

(When too bright): Decrease the value displayed on the copy quantitydisplay.

(When too dark): Increase the value displayed on the copy quantitydisplay.

* The value can be set in the range of 1 - 99.

UKOG-0162FCZZ DENSITY No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W

UKOG-0089CSZZ DENSITY No.

0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.9 0

KODAK GRAY SCALE

1 2 3 4 19 A

Auto Mode Brightness 1 step onlyManual Mode Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the center

brightness is made.Photo Mode Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the center

brightness is made.Manual T/S mode

Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the center brightness is made.

T/S Auto mode Brightness 1 step only

Main code Sub code Resolution for copy density adjustment

4601 300dpi02 600dpi

1 10 W2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

White paper

Test chartTest chart

Adjustment mode

Display item

LEDSharp gray chart adjustment level

Auto mode AE COPY mode lamp "3" is slightly copied.

Text mode TEXT PRINT mode lamp "3" is slightly copied.

Photo mode PHOTO SCAN mode lamp "3" is slightly copied.

Text T/S mode TSTXT PRINT mode lampSCAN mode lamp

"3" is slightly copied.

Auto T/S mode TSAE COPY mode lampSCAN mode lamp

"3" is slightly copied.

Sharp Gray Scale adjustment levelNon toner save mode

Toner save mode

(2) Mode select key

TEXT | | | | | (1) Exposure mode, level display

1 1 22 2

2 1 1

1,2,3,1,2,3,

SP. FUNC

AUTO

ZOOM

OK

(2) Mode select key

TEXT | | | | | (1) Exposure mode, level display

1 10 W2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Slightly copied.

Not copied.

1 10 W2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Slightly copied.

Not copied.


3. High voltage adjustment

A. Main charger (Grid bias)Note:

• Use a digital multi meter with internal resistance of 10MΩ or moremeasurement.

• After adjusting the grid LOW output, adjust the HIGH output. Do notreverse the sequence.

Procedures

1) Set the digital multi meter range to DC700V.

2) Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN11-3(GRID) of high voltage section of the power PWB and set thenegative side to the frame ground (power frame).

3) Execute TC 8-02. (The main charger output is supplied for 30 secin the grid voltage HIGH output mode.)

4) Adjust the control volume (VRG1) so that the output voltage is 580±12V.

B. DV bias check

Procedures

1) Set the digital multi meter range to DC500V.

2) Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN-10-1 (DVBIAS) and set the negative side to the frame ground (powerframe).

3) Execute TC 25-01 to output the developing bias for 30sec, andcheck that the output is –400±8V.

4. Duplex adjustment (With optional RSPF installed)

A. Adjusting the paper reverse position in memory for duplex copying

This step adjusts the front surface printing (odd-number pages of adocument set) in the S-D mode copying and the leading edge positionof an image on even-number pages in the D-S mode.

That is, it covers the adjustment of the second surface printing mode(image loss at the front edge of an image) in which image data is oncestored in memory.

The image data is read, starting from its front end in the documentdelivery direction (Reference direction of document setting in the OCmode)and stored in memory.

This stored image data is printed starting at the printing start position,in the order of last-stored data to the first-stored data.

In other words, the front edge image loss of the image can be adjustedby changing the document read end position.

(Adjustment procedure)

1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of asheet of A4 white paper or letter paper)

2) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown below, inthe S-D mode and the D-S mode.

3) Execute test command 50-18.

Select the SPF memory reverse output position, and press[START] key to make a copy.

Adjust the setting so that the front edge image loss is less than 4.0mm in the R-SPF mode.An increase of 1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm inimage loss.

Note: • A digital multi meter with internal resistance of 1GΩ must beuse for correct check.

• The adjustment volume is locked, and no adjustment can bemade.

VRG1

VRDV

ModeDisplay

itemDefault LED

OC memory reverse output position

OC 50 COPY mode lamp

SPF memory reverse output position

SPF 50 PRINT mode lamp

5 10

Scale (S-D mode) Scale (D-S mode)

5 10

The front edge of thescale on test chart

Front edge of paper

Void area

less than 4 mm


B. Adjusting trailing edge void in duplex copy modeThis is the adjustment of the first surface printing mode (rear end void)in duplex copying.

In a duplex copying operation, the paper is delivered starting from therear end of the first printing surface. It is therefore necessary to make avoid area at the rear end on the first printing surface to prevent paperjam at the fusing part.

There are two adjustment modes:

1) Image cut rear end void quantity (R-SPF) 50-19 (SCAN modelamp)The size (length) of a document read from the R-SPF is detected,the image at the trailing edge of the first printing surface is cut tomake a void area. (The adjustment of void quantity at the timewhen the cassette paper size is not recognized.)

2) Paper trailing edge void quantity 50-19 (PRINT mode lamp)This adjustment is made when the cassette paper size isrecognized. The trailing edge void quantity can be adjusted bychanging the trailing edge image laser OFF timing.

The paper void quantity should be first adjusted before the image cuttrailing edge void quantity (R-SPF) is adjusted.

The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [←/→] key.(Adjustment range; 1 – 99)

Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the setvalue and make a copy. (The paper information is cleared for everycopy.)

When the set value is increased by 1, the void amount is increased byabout 0.1mm.

* The initial value of duplex setting is 2to2.

(Adjustment procedure)

(1) Paper trailing edge void quantity1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of a

sheet of A/4 white paper or letter paper)

2) Set the test chart on the document glass as shown below.

3) Execute test command 50-19 to turn on the PRINT mode lamp andmake the printing mode in OC-D mode.Make a copy of the test chart to check the void area of the scale onthe image.

Adjust the setting so that the void area is 4 - 5 mm. An increase in 1 ofsetting represents 0.1 mm in void area.

(2) Image cut trailing edge void quantity (R-SPF)1) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown below.

2) Execute test command 50-19 to turn on the SCAN mode lamp(onthe operation panel) and make the printing mode in the D-D mode.

3) Remove and reinsert the cassette.

Note: Make sure to carry out this step before making a copy duringthis adjustment.

4) Make a copy and check the void area of the scale on the image.Adjust the setting so that the void area is 2 - 4 mm. An increase of1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm in void area.l Void position to be checked

ModeDisplay

itemDefault LED

Paper rear edge void amount

DEN-B 50 PRINT mode lamp

Print start position (Duplex back surface)

RRC-D 50 SCAN mode lamp

2nd printing surface where scale is printed (lower side)

Document guide The trailing edge has a scale

Table glass

The trailing edge void on the first printing surface is shown above.

Paper

Void position to be check

Scale (D-D mode)


5. SPF (RSPF) scan position automatic adjustment (With optional SPF/RSPF installed)

Place a black chart so that it covers the SPF scan glass and the OCglass together, and close the OC cover.

When test command 53-08 is executed, the current adjustment valueis displayed as the initial display.

* Default is 1. Adjustment range is 1 – 99. Adjustment unit 1 = about0.127mm

* If the values are kept as the default values, SPF scan is not per-formed properly. The front area of the proper scan position may bescanned.

In case of AUTO, press [START] key, and the mirror unit scans fromthe home position to the SPF scan position with the adjustment valuedisplayed. The SPF glass cover edge position is calculated from thedifference between the SPFG glass cover edge and the OC sidedocument glass CCD output level. If the adjustment is normal, theadjusted value is displayed. If abnormal, the error LED lights up withthe current set value displayed.

During the error LED is lighted, when [START] key is pressed again,execution is performed again.

Operation

The operation is similar to test command 46-01. (In MANUAL)

OK/ERR display in AUTO

* Use a black chart (UKOG-0011QSZZ) or prepare a chart as shownbelow.Chart size: 300 x 100, prepared with cutting sheet No. 791 (Black) oran equivalent one.

6. RSPF (SPF) mode sub scanning direction magnification ratio adjustment (With optional SPF/RSPF installed)

Note: Before performing this adjustment, be sure to check that the OCmode adjustment in copying has been completed.

1) Put a scale on the original table as shown below, and make anormal copy (100%) on the front and the back surfaces to make atest chart.

Note: Since the printed copy is used as a test chart, put the scale inparalled with the edge lines.

2) Set the test chart on the RSPF and make a duplex copy (D-D or D-S) in the normal ratio (100%).

3) Compare the scale image and the actual image.If necessary, perform the following adjustment procedures.

4) Execute TC 48-05.

5) The current front surface sub scanning direction magnification ratiocorrection value is displayed in two digits on the display section.To select SIDE1 and SIDE2, use [←/→] keys.

6) Enter the set value and press the start key.

When adjusting the RSPF, use [2-SIDED COPY] key to selectsingle/duplex after entering the one page print mode, performing 2-page single copy.

* When there is no document in SPF, copy is inhibited.

<Adjustment specification>

ModeDisplay

itemDefault LED

SPF scan position auto adjustment

AUTO 1 COPY mode lamp

SPF scan position manual adjustment

MANU 1 PRINT mode lamp

Reason: To prevent erroneous detection by disturbing light of afluorescent lamp, etc.

<When OK> <When ERR>

53-08 SPF AUTOAUTO 100% ** OK

53-08 SPF AUTOAUTO 100% ** ERR

6cm or more is required.

The size of the black chart (UKOG-0011QSZZ) is 297 x 420. Divide itinto four for use.

ModeDisplay

itemDefault LED

Sub scan magnification ratio adjustment on the surface of SPF/RSPF document

SIDE1 50 COPY mode lamp

Sub scan magnification ratio adjustment on the surface of RSPF document

SIDE2 50 PRINT mode lamp

Adjustment mode

Spec value TC Set valueSetting range

Sub scanning direction magnification ratio (SPF/RSPF mode)

At normal: ±1.0%

48-5 Add 1: 0.1% increaseReduce 1: 0.1% decrease

1 – 99


7. Automatic black level correctiona. Cases when the adjustment is required

1) When the main PWB is replaced.

2) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced.

3) When "U2" trouble occurs.

4) When repairing or replacing the optical section.

b. Adjustment procedure

Used to acquire the black level target value used for the black leveladjustment of white balance.

When test command 63-02 is executed, the current correction value isdisplayed in 3 digits of 12bit hexadecimal number.

Place the gray gradation chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) used as thecorrection document so that the density 10 (black side) comes on theleft side and that the chart is upside down at the center of the plate leftcenter.

When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the mirror base unitscans the chart and calculates the correction value.

After completion of correction, the corrected value is displayed on theLCD.

* Default: 0

* If the value is set to the default, operation is made with 0x60.

c. Operation

1) Initial display

2) [OK (ENTER)/START] Correction start

<During canceling - When C/CA is pressed->

After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entry standbymode.

3) After execution

3) In case of an error

63-02 BLACK LEVEL 0

63-02 BLACK LEVELEXECUTING...

THE JOB IS BEINGCANCELED.

63-02 BLACK LEVEL *** OK

63-02 BLACK LEVEL *** ERR

Chart back surface

10


[10] TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES

1. Entering the test command modeTo enter the serviceman test command mode, press the keys as follows:

[#] key → [*] key → [C] key → [*] key

To cancel the test command mode, press the [CA] key.

2. Key rule

3. List of test commands

[10KEY]: Entry of MAIN CODE/SUB CODESelection of an itemSetup of an adjustment value in case of test commands for adjustment

[←/→]: Selection of MAIN CODE/SUB CODE Selection of an item

[OK (ENTER)/START]: Settlement<In case of test commands for print>[OK (ENTER)]: Settlement (Without print)[START]: Settlement/Print

[C]: (Interrupting operation check) Returns to the upper hierarchy.In case of test command of operation check, terminates the operations.

[CA]: Exits from the test command mode.For a test command of adjustment, the display returns to the initial display (00-00).

Main code

Sub code

Contents

1 01 Mirror scan (SCAN CHK)02 Mirror home position sensor (MHPS) status display

(MHP-SENSOR)06 Mirror scan aging (SCAN AGING)

2 01 Single Paper Feeder (SPF) aging (SPF AGING) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the SPF is installed.)

02 SPF sensor status display (SPF SENSOR) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the SPF is installed.)

03 SPF motor operation check (SPF MOTOR CHK) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the SPF is installed.)

06 RSPF resist clutch operation check (RSPF RES.CHK)(Enabled only when RSPF is set.) (Executable only whenthe RSPF is installed.)

08 SPF paper feed solenoid operation check (SPF SPUS CHK) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the SPF is installed.)

09 RSPF reverse solenoid operation check (RSPF SPFS CHK) (Enabled only when RSPF is set.) (Executable only when the RSPF is installed.)

10 RSPF paper exit gate solenoid operation check (RSPF SGS CHK) (Enabled only when RSPF is set.) (Executable only when the RSPF is installed.)

3 03 Shifter operation check (SHIFTER CHK)5 01 Operation panel display check (LCD/LED CHK)

02 Fusing lamp, cooling fan operation check (HT LAMP CHK)

03 Copy lamp ON check (C-LAMP CHK)6 01 Paper feed solenoid (CPFS1, CPFS2, MPFS) operation

check (PSOL CHK)02 Resist roller solenoid (RRS) operation check (RES.R

SOL CHK)7 01 Check of warm-up display and aging with JAM (W-UP/

AGING)06 Interval aging (INTERVAL AGING)08 Shift to copy with warm-up display (W-UP C-MODE)

Main code

Sub code

Contents

8 01 Developing bias output (DVLP BIAS SET.)02 Main charger output (Grid HIGH) (MHV(H) SET.)03 Main charger output (Grid LOW) (MHV(L) SET.)06 Transfer charger output (THV SET.)

9 01 Duplex motor normal rotation check (DPLX ROT.) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON) (Executable only when the RSPF is installed.)

02 Duplex motor reverse rotation check (DPLX ROT.REV.) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON) (Executable only when the RSPF is installed.)

04 Duplex motor rotating speed adjustment (DPLX ROT.SPEED) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON) (Executable only when the RSPF is installed.)

10 00 Toner motor operation (TONER MOTOR)14 00 Cancel of trouble other than U2 (TRBL CANC.)16 00 U2 trouble cancel (U2 TRBL CANC.)20 01 Maintenance counter clear (M-CNT CLR.)21 01 Maintenance cycle setting (M-CYCLE)22 01 Maintenance counter display (M-CNT)

02 Maintenance preset display (M-CNT PRESET)04 JAM total counter display (JAM TTL CNT)05 Total counter display (TTL CNT)06 Developer counter display (DVLP CNT)08 SPF counter display (SPF CNT) (Disabled when set to

OC) (Executable only when the SPF is installed.)11 FAX-related counter display (Executable only when the

FAX is installed.)12 Drum counter display (DRUM CNT)13 CRUM type display (CRUM TYPE)14 ROM version display (ROM VER.)16 Duplex counter display (DPLX CNT) (Enabled when

Duplex setting is ON) (Executable only when the RSPF is installed.)

17 Copy counter display (COPIES CNT)18 Printer counter display (PRT.CNT)19 Scanner mode counter display (S-MODE CNT)21 Scanner counter display (SCAN CNT)22 SPF JAM counter display (S JAM CNT) (Disabled when

set to OC) (Executable only when the SPF is installed.)

AR-M150/M155/M155X TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 1

24 01 JAM total counter clear (JAM TTL CLR.)04 SPF counter clear (SPF CLR.) (Disabled when set to OC)

(Executable only when the SPF is installed.)05 Duplex counter clear (DPLX CLR.) (Enabled when

Duplex setting is ON)06 Developer counter clear (DVLP CLR.)07 Drum counter clear (DRUM CLR.)08 Copy counter clear (COPIES CLR.)09 Printer counter clear (PRT.CLR.)10 FAX counter clear (FAX CLR.) (Executable only when the

FAX is installed.)13 Scanner counter clear (SCAN CLR.)14 SPF JAM total counter clear (S JAM TTL CLR.) (Disabled

when set to OC) (Executable only when the SPF is installed.)

15 Scanner mode counter clear (S-MODE CLR.)25 01 Main motor operation check (MAIN MOTOR CHK)

10 Polygon motor operation check (LSU CHK)26 02 (R)SPF setting (SPF/RSPF) (Executable only when the

SPF/RSPF is installed.)03 Second cassette setting (2ND TRAY)04 Main unit duplex setting (DPLX) (Executable only when

the RSPF is installed.)06 Destination setting (DESTINATION)07 Machine conditions check (CPM)20 Rear edge void setting (END EDGE)30 CE mark support control ON/OFF (CE MARK)37 Cancel of stop at developer life over (DVLP LIFE END)39 Memory capacity check (MEM.CHK)40 Polygon motor OFF time setting (Time required from

completion of printing to turning OFF the motor) (LSU MOTOR OFF)

42 Transfer ON timing control setting (TC ON TIMING)43 Side void amount setting (SIDE VOID)62 Energy-save mode copy lamp setting (C-LAMP E-S)

30 01 Paper sensor status display (P-SENSOR)41 06 OC cover float detection level (OC FLOAT LEVEL)

(Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the SPF/RSPF is installed.)

43 01 Fusing temperature setting (Normal copy) (FU TEMP)04 Fusing temperature setting in multi coy (FU TEMP

MULTI)05 Fusing temperature setting in duplex copy (FU TEMP

DPLX) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON)14 Fusing start temperature setting (FU TEMP START)

46 01 Copy density adjustment (300dpi) (EXP.LEVEL 300)02 Copy density adjustment (600dpi) (EXP.LEVEL 600)12 Density adjustment in the FAX mode (Collective

adjustment) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)13 FAX mode density adjustment (normal text) (Executable

only when the FAX is installed.)14 FAX mode density adjustment (Fine text) (Executable

only when the FAX is installed.)15 FAX mode density adjustment (Super fine) (Executable

only when the FAX is installed.)18 Image contrast adjustment (300dpi) (GAMMA 300)19 Exposure mode setting (AE MODE)20 SPF exposure correction (EXP.LEVEL SPF) (Disabled

when set to OC) (Executable only when the SPF is installed.)

29 Image contrast adjustment (600dpi) (GAMMA 600)30 AE limit adjustment (AE LIMIT)31 Image sharpness adjustment (SHARPNESS)

Main code

Sub code

Contents

46 32 Copier color reproduction setting (COLOR REAPPEAR)39 FAX mode sharpness adjustment (Executable only when

the FAX is installed.)48 01 Mains can/sub scan direction magnification ratio (COPY

MAG.)05 SPF/RSPF mode sub scan direction magnification ratio

in copying (SPF/RSPF MAG.) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the SPF/RSPF is installed.)

49 01 Download mode (DOWNLOAD MODE)50 01 Lead edge image position (LEAD EDGE)

06 Copy lead edge position adjustment (SPF/RSPF) (SPF/RSPF EDGE) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the SPF/RSPF is installed.)

10 Print center offset adjustment (PRT.OFF-CENTER)12 Document feed off-center adjustment (ORG.OFF-

CENTER)18 Memory reverse position adjustment in duplex copy

(DPLX REVERSE) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON with OC or SPF set) (Executable only when the RSPF is installed.)

19 Duplex copy rear edge void adjustment (DPLX END EDGE) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON) (Executable only when the RSPF is installed.)

51 02 Resist amount adjustment (RESIST ADJ.)53 08 SPF scan position automatic adjustment (SPF AUTO)

(Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the SPF is installed.)

61 03 HSYNC output check (LSU CHK)63 01 Shading check (SHADING CHK)

02 Black level automatic correction (BLACK LEVEL)64 01 Self print (1by2 mode) (SELF PRT.)66 01 FAX soft SW setting (Executable only when the FAX is

installed.)02 FAX soft SW initializing (excluding the adjustment

values) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)03 FAX PWB memory check (Executable only when the

FAX is installed.)04 Signal send mode (Max. value) (Executable only when

the FAX is installed.)05 Signal send mode (Soft SW set value) (Executable only

when the FAX is installed.)07 Image memory content print (Executable only when the

FAX is installed.)10 Image memory content clear (Executable only when the

FAX is installed.)11 300bps signal send (Max. value) (Executable only when

the FAX is installed.)12 300bps signal send (Soft SW set value) (Executable only

when the FAX is installed.)13 Dial test (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)17 DTMF signal send (Max. value) (Executable only when

the FAX is installed.)18 DTMF signal send (Soft SW set value) (Executable only

when the FAX is installed.)21 FAX information print (Executable only when the FAX is

installed.)24 FAST SRAM clear (Executable only when the FAX is

installed.)30 TEL/LIU status change check (Executable only when the

FAX is installed.)32 Receive data check (Executable only when the FAX is

installed.)33 Signal detection check (Executable only when the FAX is

installed.)

Main code

Sub code

Contents


4. Descriptions of various test commands

66 34 Communication time measurement (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

37 Speaker sound volume setting (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

38 Time setting/check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

41 CI signal check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

Main code

Sub code

Contents

Main code

Sub code

Contents Details of function/operation

1 01 Mirror scan (SCAN CHK) [Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the home position is checked and the mirror base per-forms full scan at the speed of the set magnification ratio.

During operation, the set magnification ratio is displayed.

The mirror home position sensor status is displayed with the “COPY mode lamp”. (When the mirror isin the home position, the lamp lights up.)

During operation, the copy lamp lights up.

When [C] key is pressed, if the operation is on the way, it is terminated and the machine goes to thesub code entry standby mode.

[Operation]

02 Mirror home position sensor (MHPS) status display (MHP-SENSOR)

[Function]Monitors the mirror home position sensor, and makes the "COPY mode lamp" turn on during the sen-sor ON status.

[Operation]

06 Mirror scan aging (SCAN AGING)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the mirror base performs full scan at the speed of the setmagnification ratio.

During operation, the set magnification ratio is displayed.

After 3sec, the mirror base performs full scan again.

∗ When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed once, the ready lamp remains OFF.The mirror home position sensor status is displayed on the "COPY mode lamp." (The lamp is ONwhen the mirror is in the home position.)

During aging, the copy lamp is ON.

[Operation]The operation is similar to test command 1-01.

2 01 Single Paper Feeder (SPF) aging (SPF AGING) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the SPF is installed.)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the set magnification ratio is acquired and single-facedocument transport is performed in the case of SPF or duplex document transport in the case of R-SPF.

However, the operating conditions don't matter and the operation is not stopped even in case of ajam. Also the magnification ratio is displayed on the LCD.


1) Initial display

2) [ZOOM]

2) [←]

2) [→]

3) [OK (ENTER)/START]

01-01 SCAN CHK - 100% +

01-01 SCAN CHK - 78% +

01-01 SCAN CHK - 99% +

01-01 SCAN CHK - 101% +

01-01 SCAN CHKEXECUTING... - 78% +

1) Initial display

01-02 MHP-SENSOREXECUTING...


2 02 SPF sensor status display (SPF SENSOR) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the SPF is installed.)

[Function]The ON/OFF status of the SPF sensors can be checked with the LCD.When a sensor is ON, the sensor name is displayed on the LCD.

[Operation]

03 SPF motor operation check (SPF MOTOR CHK) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the SPF is installed.)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the motor rotates for 10sec at the speed correspondingto the set magnification ratio.


06 RSPF resist clutch operation check (RSPF RES.CHK) (Enabled only when RSPF is set.) (Executable only when the RSPF is installed.)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the RSPF resist clutch (SRRC) repeats ON for 500msand OFF for 500ms 20 times.

[Operation]

08 SPF paper feed solenoid operation check (SPF SPUS CHK) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the SPF is installed.)

[Function]The SPF paper feed solenoid (SPUS) repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times by the useof the solenoid drive control Bios.

[Operation]

09 RSPF reverse solenoid operation check (RSPF SPFS CHK) (Enabled only when RSPF is set.) (Executable only when the RSPF is installed.)

[Function]The SPF reverse solenoid (SPFS) repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times by the use ofthe solenoid drive control Bios.

[Operation]

10 RSPF paper exit gate solenoid operation check (RSPF SGS CHK) (Enabled only when RSPF is set.) (Executable only when the RSPF is installed.)

[Function]The SPF paper exit gate solenoid (SGS) repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times by theuse of the solenoid drive control Bios.

[Operation]

3 03 Shifter operation check (SHIFTER CHK)

[Function]The shifter is moved back and forth in four reciprocations.

[Operation]

Main code

Sub code


Sensor Display itemDocument set sensor SPIDSPF document transport sensor SPPDSPF paper feed cover open/close sensor SDSW

1) Initial display 2) When the sensor is ON:

02-02 SPF SENSOR 02-02 SPF SENSORSPID SPPD SDSW

1) Initial display

02-06 RSPF RES.CHKEXECUTING...

1) Initial display

02-08 SPF SPUS CHKEXECUTING...

1) Initial display

02-09 RSPF SPFS CHKEXECUTING...

1) Initial display

02-10 RSPF SGS CHKEXECUTING...

1) Initial display

03-03 SHIFTER CHKEXECUTING...


5 01 Operation panel display check (LCD/LED CHK) [Function]

<LED check mode (All ON/Individual ON)>When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, all the LCD's on the operation panel are turned ON (allpixels ON).

After 5sec of ON, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.

When [MODE SWITCH] key is pressed under the all ON state, the mode is shifted to the individualON mode, where the LED's are turned on one by one from the left upper end to the left lower sidethen from the right upper side to the right lower side. (All the pixels of LCD are lighted simultaneously.)After lighting all the LCD's sequentially, all the LCD's are lighted simultaneously. After 5sec from light-ing all the LCD's simultaneously, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. (Cycle ofindividual ON mode: ON 300ms, OFF 20ms)

When [C] key is pressed in the LED check mode, the machine goes into the sub code entry standbymode.

When [START] key is pressed, the machine goes into the key input check mode.

<Key input check mode>When the machine goes into the key input check mode, the LCD displays 0.

When any key is pressed after pressing a key on the operation panel, "+1" is added to the value.

Once a key is pressed, it is not recounted.

When [START] key is pressed, counting is made and the machine goes into the LED ON check mode(LED all ON status) after 3sec.

When [C] key is pressed for the first time, it is counted. When it is pressed for the second time, themachine goes into the sub code entry mode.

When [CA] key is pressed for the first time, it is counted. When it is pressed for the second time, themachine goes out from the test command mode.

(Note in the key input check mode)• Be sure to press [START] key at the last. (If it is pressed on the way, the machine goes into the LED

ON check mode.) (LED all ON status)

• Multi key input is ignored.

[Operation]<LED check mode (All ON/Individual ON)>

<Key input check mode>

02 Fusing lamp, cooling fan operation check (HT LAMP CHK)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the fusing lamp repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for500ms 5 times. During this period, the cooling fan motor rotates.

[Operation]

03 Copy lamp ON check (C-LAMP CHK)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the copy lamp turns ON for 5sec.

[Operation]

Main code

Sub code


1) Initial display

2) When [MODE SWITCH] key is pressed, the machine goes into the individual ON mode.

1) Initial display 2) [OK (ENTER)/START]

05-01 LCD/LED CHK. 0

05-01 LCD/LED CHK. **

1) Initial display

05-02 HT LAMP CHKEXECUTING...

1) Initial display

05-03 C-LAMP CHKEXECUTING...


6 01 Paper feed solenoid (CPFS1, CPFS2, MPFS) operation check (PSOL CHK)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the selected paper feed solenoid repeats ON for 500msand OF for 500ms 20times.

When [←/→/10KEY] is pressed, the paper feed solenoid setting is switched.

[Operation]

02 Resist roller solenoid (RRS) operation check (RES.R SOL CHK)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the resist solenoid repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for500ms 20 times.

[Operation]

7 01 Check of warm-up display and aging with JAM (W-UP/AGING)

[Function]Copying is repeated to make the set quantity of copies.When the test command is executed, warm-up is started and warm-up time is added for every secondfrom 0 and displayed.When warm-up is completed, addition is stopped. When [CA] key is pressed, the ready lamp lights up.After that, enter the copy quantity with [10KEY] and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to repeat copy-ing of the set quantity (interval 0sec).To cancel the test command, turn off the power or execute a test command which causes hardwarereset.

[Operation]

06 Interval aging (INTERVAL AGING)

[Function]Copying is repeated to make the set quantity of copies.When the test command is executed, warm-up is performed and the ready lamp is lighted.Enter the copy quantity with the [10KEY] and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key, and copying is exe-cuted to make the set quantity of copies, and the ready state is kept for 3sec, and copying is executedagain to make the set quantity of copies. These operations are repeated.To cancel the test command, turn off the power or execute a test command which executes hardwarereset.

[Operation]

08 Shift to copy with warm-up display (W-UP C-MODE)

[Function]Enter the test command code, and warm-up is started and warm-up time is counted for every secondfrom 0 and displayed.When [CA] key is pressed during counting up, "0" is displayed on the display and counting is stopped.However, warm-up is continued.After completion of warm-up, counting is terminated. (The aging function is removed from test com-mand 7-01.)

[Operation]

Main code

Sub code


Code number Setting Remark0 CPFS11 CPFS2 Operation is possible only when No. 2 cassette is installed. 2 MPFS

1) Initial display

2) [→/10KEY]

2) [←/10KEY]


4) Returns to the initial display.

06-01 PSOL CHK0:CPFS1

06-01 PSOL CHK1:CPFS2

06-01 PSOL CHK2:MPFS

06-01 PSOL CHKEXECUTING...

1) Initial display

06-02 RES.R SOL CHKEXECUTING...

1) Initial display 2) After 10sec

07-01 W-UP/AGING 0

07-01 W-UP/AGING 10

1) Initial display (Basic display of copy)

READY TO COPY 100% A4 0

1) Initial display 2) After 10sec

07-08 W-UP C-MODE 0

07-08 W-UP C-MODE 10


8 01 Developing bias output (DVLP BIAS SET.)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the developing bias signal is turned ON for 30sec.

When, however, an actual output value is measured, use test command 25-01.

After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.

[Operation]

02 Main charger output (Grid HIGH) (MHV(H) SET.)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the main charger is outputted for 30sec in the grid volt-age HIGH move.


[Operation]

03 Main charger output (Grid LOW) (MHV(L) SET.)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the main charger is outputted for 30sec in the grid volt-age LOW move.


[Operation]

06 Transfer charger output (THV SET.)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the transfer charger is outputted for 30sec.


[Operation]

9 01 Duplex motor normal rotation check (DPLX ROT.) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON) (Executable only when the RSPF is installed.)

[Function]Use the duplex motor Bios to drive the duplex motor in the normal direction (paper exit direction) for30sec.


[Operation]

02 Duplex motor reverse rotation check (DPLX ROT.REV.) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON) (Executable only when the RSPF is installed.)

[Function]Use the duplex motor Bios to drive the duplex motor in the reverse direction for 30sec.


[Operation]

04 Duplex motor rotating speed adjustment (DPLX ROT.SPEED) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON) (Executable only when the RSPF is installed.)

[Function]When this Test Command is executed, the currently set value is displayed.Enter the adjustment value with [10KEY] and press [START] key. The entered value is stored and the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. The greater the set value is, the higher the speed is. The smaller the set value is, the lower the speed is. (Setting range: 1 - 13, Default: 8)

[Operation]

Main code

Sub code


1) Initial display

08-01 DVLP BIAS SET.EXECUTING...

1) Initial display

08-02 MHV(H) SET.EXECUTING...

1) Initial display

08-03 MHV(L) SET.EXECUTING...

1) Initial display

08-03 THV SET.EXECUTING...

1) Initial display

09-01 DPLX ROT.EXECUTING...

1) Initial display

09-02 DPLX ROT.REV.EXECUTING...

1) Initial display 2) [10KEY] 3) [OK (ENTER)/START]

09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED 8( 1-13)




10 00 Toner motor operation (TONER MOTOR)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the toner motor is rotated for 30sec.

After completion of this process, the machine goes into the main code entry standby mode.

[Operation]

14 00 Cancel of trouble other than U2 (TRBL CANC.)

[Function]Used to cancel troubles other than U2.∗ Cancel troubles such as H trouble which writes data into EEPROM, and perform hardware reset.

[Operation]

16 00 U2 trouble cancel (U2 TRBL CANC.)

[Function]Used to cancel U2 trouble.

When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, check sum of the total counter in the EEPROM is rewrit-ten and hardware reset is made.

[Operation]

20 01 Maintenance counter clear (M-CNT CLR.)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the maintenance count value is cleared and "000,000" isdisplayed.

[Operation]

21 01 Maintenance cycle setting (M-CYCLE)

[Function]The code of the currently set maintenance cycle value is displayed (initial display) and the set data are saved.

[Operation]

22 01 Maintenance counter display (M-CNT)

[Function]The maintenance counter is displayed.

[Operation]

Main code

Sub code


1) Initial display

10-00 TONER MOTOREXECUTING...

1) Initial display

14-00 TRBL CANC.CLEARED

1) Initial display

16-00 U2 TRBL CANC.CLEARED

1) Initial display

20-01 M-CNT CLR.CLEARED 000,000

Code Setting Remark0 3,000 sheets1 6,000 sheets2 9,000 sheets3 13,000 sheets4 25,000 sheets Default5 Free (999,999 sheets)

1) The current set value isdisplayed.

2) [→/10KEY]

2) [←/10KEY]


21-01 M-CYCLE4:25,000 ( 0-5 )

21-01 M-CYCLE5:FREE ( 0-5 )

21-01 M-CYCLE3:13,000 ( 0-5 )

21-01 M-CYCLE5:FREE ( 0-5 )

1) Initial display

22-01 M-CNT ***,***


22 02 Maintenance preset display (M-CNT PRESET)

[Function]The quantity (25,000 sheets, etc.) corresponding to the code set with TC21-01 is displayed.

[Operation]

04 JAM total counter display (JAM TTL CNT)

[Function]The JAM total counter is displayed.

[Operation]

05 Total counter display (TTL CNT)

[Function]The total counter value is displayed.

[Operation]

06 Developer counter display (DVLP CNT)

[Function]The developer counter data is acquired and displayed on the LCD.

[Operation]

08 SPF counter display (SPF CNT) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the SPF is installed.)

[Function]The SPF counter is displayed.

[Operation]

11 FAX-related counter display (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]The FAX-related counter is displayed.

[Operation]

12 Drum counter display (DRUM CNT)

[Function]The drum counter is displayed.

[Operation]

Main code

Sub code


1) Initial display

22-02 M-CNT PRESET ***,***

1) Initial display

22-04 JAM TTL CNT ***,***

1) Initial display

22-05 TTL CNT ***,***

1) Initial display

22-06 DVLP CNT ***,***

1) Initial display

22-08 SPF CNT ***,***

1) Initial display

∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.

2) Select 1

("xxx,xxx" is the current value.)

∗ [CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".

2) Select 2

("xxxx: xxx. xx" is the current value.)


SELECT COUNTER1:PAGE 2:TIME

SEND PAGE:xxx,xxxRECV PAGE:xxx,xxx

TX TIME:xxxx:xx.xxRX TIME:xxxx:xx.xx

1) Initial display

22-12 DRUM CNT ***,***


22 13 CRUM type display (CRUM TYPE)

[Function]When the test command is executed, the CRUM type currently set (written) in the CRUM chip is displayed.

[Operation]

14 ROM version display (ROM VER.)

[Function]The P-ROM version is displayed.Press [←/→/10KEY] to switch the display version.

[Operation]

16 Duplex counter display (DPLX CNT) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON) (Executable only when the RSPF is installed.)

[Function]The duplex counter is displayed.

[Operation]

17 Copy counter display (COPIES CNT)

[Function]The copy counter is displayed.

[Operation]

18 Printer counter display (PRT.CNT)

[Function]The printer counter is displayed.

[Operation]

19 Scanner mode counter display (S-MODE CNT)

[Function]The scanner mode counter is displayed.

[Operation]

Main code

Sub code


Code number CRUM type Display item00 Not set 001 BTA-A BTA-A02 BTA-B BTA-B03 BTA-C BTA-C99 Conversion CONVERSION

1) The CRUM type is displayed.

22-13 CRUM TYPE01:BTA-A

Code number Version Display item0 Main unit Program MAIN PROG.1 F-IMC Program F-IMC PROG.2 LCD DATA LCD DATA

1) Initial display 2) [→/10KEY]

2) [←/10KEY]

22-14 ROM VER.MAIN PROG. 00.00

22-14 ROM VER.F-IMC PROG. 00.00

22-14 ROM VER.LCD DATA 00.00

1) Initial display

22-16 DPLX CNT ***,***

1) Initial display

22-17 COPIES CNT ***,***

1) Initial display

22-18 PRT.CNT ***,***

1) Initial display

22-19 S-MODE CNT ***,***


22 21 Scanner counter display (SCAN CNT)

[Function]The scanner counter is displayed.

[Operation]

22 SPF JAM counter display (S JAM CNT) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the SPF is installed.)

[Function]The SPF JAM counter is displayed.

[Operation]

24 01 JAM total counter clear (JAM TTL CLR.)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the JAM total counter is cleared to 0 and "000,000" isdisplayed on the LCD.

[Operation]

04 SPF counter clear (SPF CLR.) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the SPF is installed.)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the SPF counter value is cleared to 0 and "000,000" isdisplayed on the LCD.

[Operation]

05 Duplex counter clear (DPLX CLR.) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the duplex counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000"is displayed on the LCD.

[Operation]

06 Developer counter clear (DVLP CLR.)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the developer counter value is cleared to 0, and"000,000" is displayed on the LCD.

[Operation]

07 Drum counter clear (DRUM CLR.)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the drum counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" isdisplayed on the LCD.

[Operation]

08 Copy counter clear (COPIES CLR.)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the copy counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" isdisplayed on the LCD.

[Operation]

Main code

Sub code


1) Initial display

22-21 SCAN CNT ***,***

1) Initial display

22-22 S JAM CNT ***,***

1) Initial display

24-01 JAM TTL CLR.CLEARED 000,000

1) Initial display

24-04 SPF CLR.CLEARED 000,000

1) Initial display

24-05 DPLX CLR.CLEARED 000,000

1) Initial display

24-06 DVLP CLR.CLEARED 000,000

1) Initial display

24-07 DRUM CLR.CLEARED 000,000

1) Initial display

24-08 COPIES CLR.CLEARED 000,000


24 09 Printer counter clear (PRT.CLR.)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the printer counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" isdisplayed on the LCD.

[Operation]

10 FAX counter clear (FAX CLR.) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]When PRINT switch is pressed, the FAX count value is set to 0 and "000,000" is displayed on theLCD.

[Operation]

13 Scanner counter clear (SCAN CLR.)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the scanner counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD.

[Operation]

14 SPF JAM total counter clear (S JAM TTL CLR.) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the SPF is installed.)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the SPF JAM total counter value is cleared to 0, and"000,000" is displayed on the LCD.

[Operation]

15 Scanner mode counter clear (S-MODE CLR.)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the scanner mode counter value is cleared to 0, and"000,000" is displayed on the LCD.

[Operation]

25 01 Main motor operation check (MAIN MOTOR CHK)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the main motor (and the duplex motor in the case of aduplex model) is operated for 30sec.

To reduce toner consumption, if the developing unit is installed, the developing bias, the maincharger, and the grid are also outputted.

In this case, laser discharge is required when stopping the motor, the polygon motor is also operatedat the same time. Check for installation of the developing unit. If it is not installed, the high voltageabove is not outputted and only the motor is rotated.

To check the developing bias, install the developing unit.

After completion of 30sec operation, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.

[Operation]

10 Polygon motor operation check (LSU CHK)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the Bios is called to rotate the polygon motor for 30sec. After completion of 30sec operation, the operation is turned off with the Bios and the machine goesinto the sub code entry standby mode.

[Operation]

Main code

Sub code


1) Initial display

24-09 PRT.CLR.CLEARED 000,000

1) Initial display

24-10 FAX CLR.CLEARED 000,000

1) Initial display

24-13 SCAN CLR.CLEARED 000,000

1) Initial display

24-14 S JAM TTL CLR.CLEARED 000,000

1) Initial display

24-15 S-MODE CLR.CLEARED 000,000

1) Initial display

25-01 MAIN MOTOR CHKEXECUTING...

1) Initial display

25-10 LSU CHKEXECUTING...


26 02 (R)SPF setting (SPF/RSPF) (Executable only when the SPF/RSPF is installed.)

[Function]When this test command is executed, the current set SPF is displayed. Enter the code number corre-sponding to the desired SPF and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to save the setting.


03 Second cassette setting (2ND TRAY)

[Function]When this test command is executed, the current set second cassette is displayed. Enter the codenumber corresponding to the desired second cassette and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to savethe setting.


04 Main unit duplex setting (DPLX) (Executable only when the RSPF is installed.)

[Function]When this test command is executed, the current set duplex is displayed. Enter the code number cor-responding to the desired duplex and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to save the setting.


06 Destination setting (DESTINATION)

[Function]When this test command is executed, the current set destination is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired destination and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to save the setting.

∗ For Japan AB series, there is no schedule for production.


07 Machine conditions check (CPM)

[Function]When this test command is executed, the current machine setting is displayed.

[Operation]

20 Rear edge void setting (END EDGE)

[Function]When this test command is executed, the current set rear edge void is displayed. Enter the code num-ber corresponding to the desired rear edge void and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to save the set-ting.


Main code

Sub code


Code number SPF Display item0 SPF NO SPF OFF1 SPF YES SPF ON2 RSPF YES RSPF ON

Code number Second cassette Display item0 Second cassette NO OFF1 Second cassette YES ON

Code number Duplex Display item0 Duplex NO OFF1 Duplex YES ON

Code number Destination Display item0 Inch series INCH1 EX Japan AB series AB2 Japan AB series –3 China (EX Japan AB series + China paper support) CHINA

CPM Coy quantity Remark10 CPM 1012 CPM 1213 CPM 1314 CPM 1415 CPM 1516 CPM 16

1) The machine setting is displayed.

26-07 CPM10 CPM

Code number Setting Display item Remark0 Rear edge void NO OFF1 Rear edge void YES ON Default


26 30 CE mark support control ON/OFF (CE MARK)

[Function]When this test command is executed, the current set CE mark support control is displayed. Enter thecode number corresponding to the desired CE mark support control and press [OK (ENTER)/START]key to save the setting.


37 Cancel of stop at developer life over (DVLP LIFE END)

[Function]When this test command is executed, the current setting is displayed. Enter the code number corre-sponding to the desired setting and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to save the setting.


39 Memory capacity check (MEM.CHK)

[Function]When the test command is executed, the currently installed SDRAM of the main unit is displayed.

[Operation]

40 Polygon motor OFF time setting (Time required from completion of printing to turning OFF the motor) (LSU MOTOR OFF)

[Function]When this test command is executed, the current setting is displayed. Enter the code number corre-sponding to the desired setting and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to save the setting.


42 Transfer ON timing control setting (TC ON TIMING)

[Function]When this test command is executed, the currently set value of the transfer ON timing is displayed(initial display), and the set value is saved. (Setting range: 0 – 9, Default: 5)

∗ The default “5” of transfer ON timing is “330ms passed from PS release.”∗ When set to “0,” it is the same as setting to “5.”

[Operation]

The operation is similar to test command 21-01.

Main code

Sub code


Code number Setting Display item Remark0 CE mark support control OFF OFF Default (100V series)1 CE mark support control ON ON

Code number Setting Display item Remark0 Stop at developer life over STOP1 Cancel of stop at developer life over NONSTOP

Code number Setting Remark8 8 MBYTE

1) Memory capacity display

26-39 MEM.CHK8 MBYTE

Code number Setting Display item Remark0 0sec 0 SEC.1 30sec 30 SEC. Default2 60sec 60 SEC.3 90sec 90 SEC.

Code Setting Remark0 0 msec1 –40 msec2 –30 msec3 –20 msec4 –10 msec5 0 msec Default6 +10 msec7 +20 msec8 +30 msec9 +40 msec


26 43 Side void amount setting (SIDE VOID)

[Function]When this test command is executed, the currently set code of the side void quantity is displayed (ini-tial display), and the set data are saved. (Setting range: 0 – 10, Default: 4 (= One side 2.0mm))

∗ When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the side void is changed as follows:Side void adjustment: The side void is increased by 0.5mm. (The side void of “Set value x 0.5mm”is made.)

[Operation]

62 Energy-save mode copy lamp setting (C-LAMP E-S)

[Function]Used to set half-ON /OFF of the copy lamp in the pre-heat mode.

When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the desiredcode number and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to save the setting.


30 01 Paper sensor status display (P-SENSOR)

[Function]The paper sensor status is displayed on the LCD.

∗ Since the manual paper feed sensor is a single bypass sensor, its status is not displayed.∗ The width sensor is available only in the FAX models.

[Operation]

Main code

Sub code


9

Code Setting Remark0 0 mm1 0.5 mm2 1.0 mm3 1.5 mm4 2.0 mm Default5 2.5 mm6 3.0 mm7 3.5 mm8 4.0 mm9 4.5 mm10 5.5 mm

1) Initial display 2) [10KEY] 3) [OK (ENTER)/START]

26-43 SIDE VOID 4( 0-10)

26-43 SIDE VOID 5( 0-10)

26-43 SIDE VOID 5( 0-10)

Code number Setting Display item Remark0 Copy lamp OFF OFF1 Copy lamp half-ON ON Default

Sensor Display item RemarkPaper exit sensor PODNo. 1 tray paper width sensor PD1Paper entry sensor PPD1Duplex sensor PPD2No. 2 tray paper feed sensor PPD3New drum cartridge sensor DRST

1) Initial display 2) When sensor ON

30-01 P-SENSOR 30-01 POD PD1 PD2PPD1 PPD2 PPD3 DRST


41 06 OC cover float detection level (OC FLOAT LEVEL) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the SPF/RSPF is installed.)

[Function]When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed. When [OK (ENTER)/START]key is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the SPF scan position to acquire the OC cover floatdetection level.

When the mirror base unit returns to the home position, the acquired value is displayed.

If the detection level is not acquired, ERR display is made. (Default: 0)

Note that, this test command must be executed with the OC cover closed.∗ If the value is 0, float detection is not performed in normal jobs.

[Operation]

43 01 Fusing temperature setting (Normal copy) (FU TEMP)

[Function]When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Press [←/→/10KEY]key to change the setting and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to save the setting into the EERPOM.The machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.


04 Fusing temperature setting in multi coy (FU TEMP MULTI)

[Function]For 20th sheet or later in multi copy, the fusing temperature is automatically changed from the temper-ature set with test command 43-1 to the temperature set with this test command.

When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the code num-ber and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to change the setting.


Main code

Sub code


1) Initial display


41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL 0

41-06 OC FLOAT LEVELEXECUTING...

<Canceling - when C/CA key is pressed->

After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entrystandby mode.

3) When the level is acquired:

3) When the level is not acquired:


41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL **** OK

41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL **** ERR

Code Set temperature (°C) Remark0 1601 1652 1703 1754 1805 1856 190 Default7 1958 200

Code Set temperature (°C) Remark0 1551 1602 1653 170 Default4 1755 180


43 05 Fusing temperature setting in duplex copy (FU TEMP DPLX) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON)

[Function]In the case of duplex copy, the shift temperature set with this test command is applied to the fusingtemperature.When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the desired code number and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to save the setting.


14 Fusing start temperature setting (FU TEMP START)

[Function]When this test command is started, the currently set code number is displayed.Press [←/→/10KEY] to switch the setting, and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to save it to theEEPROM. The machine goes to the sub code entry standby mode.


Main code

Sub code


Code Shift temperature (°C) Remark0 ±0 Default1 -82 -63 -44 -25 ±06 +27 +48 +69 +8

Code Set temperature (°C) Remark0 1601 1652 1703 1754 1805 1856 1907 195 Default8 200


46 01 Copy density adjustment (300dpi) (EXP.LEVEL 300)

[Function]Copy density is set for each mode.

When this test command is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).

Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value.

When the set value is increased, the copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased, thecopy becomes lighter.

In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make darker copy,Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become darker. When made to lighter copy, Exp1. and Exp.5 copiesbecome lighter, too.

Press [←/→] key to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD.(Adjustment value: 1 – 99)

The setting procedure of the magnification ratio is the same as that to copy operation.

[Operation]

02 Copy density adjustment (600dpi) (EXP.LEVEL 600)

[Function]Copy density is set for each mode.When this test command is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value.When the set value is increased, the copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased, thecopy becomes lighter.In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make darker copy,Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become darker. When made to lighter copy, Exp1. and Exp.5 copiesbecome lighter, too.



Main code

Sub code


Mode Display item Default LEDAE mode (300dpi) AE 50 COPY mode lampTEXT mode (300dpi) TEXT 50 PRINT mode lampPHOTO mode PHOTO 50 SCAN mode lampTS mode (TEXT)(300dpi) TSTXT 50 PRINT mode lamp

SCAN mode lampTS mode (AE)(300dpi) TSAE 50 COPY mode lamp

SCAN mode lamp

1) Initial display

2) [←] Mode selection

2) [→] Mode selection

3) [10KEY] Value entry

4) [START] Fixing and printing value (Nochange on the LCD)

∗ Print is started in the set mode.

4) To fix the set value without printing, press[OK (ENTER)] key.

∗ To cancel manual feed paper empty MSG,press any key.

∗ When performing the AE mode exposureadjustment, place the test chart on the docu-ment table so that the center area of 10cm isnot covered.

46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300AE 100% 50( 1-99)

46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300TSAE 100% 50( 1-99)

46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300TEXT 100% 50( 1-99)

46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300AE 100% 62( 1-99)

46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300AE 100% 62( 1-99)

46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300AE 100% 62( 1-99)

Mode Display item Default LEDAE mode (600dpi) AE 50 COPY mode lampTEXT mode (600dpi) TEXT 50 PRINT mode lampPHOTO mode PHOTO 50 SCAN mode lampTS mode (TEXT) (600dpi) TSTXT 50 PRINT mode lampSCAN mode lampTS mode (AE) (600dpi) TSAE 50 COPY mode lampSCAN mode lamp


46 12 Density adjustment in the FAX mode (Collective adjustment) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]When [START] key is pressed, scan is executed with the entered exposure adjustment value and thedata stored on the FAX side is rewritten into the entered value.

All data of the exposure adjustment values are rewritten into the same value.

For the density adjustment table data, refer to TC46-13 (density adjustment (normal text) in the FAXmode).

[Operation]

13 FAX mode density adjustment (normal text) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]Scan is started with the exposure adjustment value entered with [START] key, and the stored data ofthe selected mode on the FAX side is rewritten into the input value.

[Operation]

14 FAX mode density adjustment (Fine text) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered exposure adjustment value and thedata of the selected mode on the FAX side is changed to the entered value.

For the density adjustment value table data, refer to TC46-13 (FAX mode density adjustment (normaltext).)

[Operation]

Main code

Sub code


1) Initial display

("XX" is the exposure adjustment value of nor-mal text stored on the FAX side.)

2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure adjust-ment value.

("YY" is the entered exposure adjustmentvalue.)

3) Scan is started (self print), and the LED of[START] key is turned off.

4) Print is started (self print).

After completion of printing, returns to “2)” dis-play.

ADJUST EXP. AUTO XX

ADJUST EXP. AUTO YY

ADJUST EXP. AUTO SCAN YY

ADJUST EXP. AUTO PRINT YY

Density adjustment value data table

When initializing each data: 50

Mode Photo Exposure adjustment valueSTD (Normal text) offFine (Fine text) on

offSfine (Super fine) on

off

1) Initial display

("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustmentvalue of normal text mode stored on the FAXside.)

2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure adjust-ment value with [10KEY].


3) Scan is started (self print), and the LED of[START] key is turned off.

4) Print is started (self print).

After completion of printing, returns to “2)” display.

ADJUST EXP. STD XX

ADJUST EXP. STD YY

ADJUST EXP. STD SCAN YY

ADJUST EXP. STD PRINT YY

1) Initial display

("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustmentvalue of the fine text mode stored on the FAXside.)



3) Scan start (self print)

4) Print start (self print)


ADJUST EXP. FINE XX

ADJUST EXP. FINE YY

ADJUST EXP. FINE SCAN YY

ADJUST EXP. AUTO PRINT YY


46 15 FAX mode density adjustment (Super fine) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered exposure adjustment value and thedata of the selected mode on the FAX side is changed to the entered value.

For the density adjustment value table data, refer to TC46-13 (FAX mode density adjustment (normaltext).)

[Operation]

18 Image contrast adjustment (300dpi) (GAMMA 300)

[Function]Contrast is set for each mode.When this test command is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value.When the set value is increased, the contrast becomes higher. When the set value is decreased, thecontrast becomes lower.In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make higher contrast,Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become in higher contrast. When made to a lower contrast, Exp1. andExp.5 copies become lower contrast, too.Press [←/→] key to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD.(Adjustment value: 1 – 99)

∗ No density display on LCD.


Main code

Sub code


1) Initial display

("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustmentvalue of the super fine mode stored on the FAXside.)






ADJUST EXP. S-FINE XX

ADJUST EXP. S-FINE YY

ADJUST EXP. S-FINE SCAN YY

ADJUST EXP. S-FINE PRINT YY

Mode Display item Default LEDAE mode (300dpi) AE 50 COPY mode lampTEXT mode (300dpi) TEXT 50 PRINT mode lampPHOTO mode PHOTO 50 SCAN mode lampTS mode (TEXT) (300dpi) TSTXT 50 PRINT mode lamp

SCAN mode lampTS mode (AE) (300dpi) TSAE 50 COPY mode lamp

SCAN mode lamp


46 19 Exposure mode setting (AE MODE)

[Function]<γ table setting>

When this test command is executed, the code number of the current set gamma table is displayed.(Default: Japan -1/Ex Japan -2)Enter the code number corresponding to the desired gamma table, and press [←/→] key to changethe mode and write into the EEPROM.

<AE operation mode>

When setting the γ table, press [→] key to change to the AE operation mode, and the current set codenumber of the AE operation mode is displayed. (Default: 0)Enter the code number corresponding to the desired AE operation mode and press [←/→] key tochange the mode and write into the EEPROM.

<PHOTO image process setting>

When [→] key is pressed in AE operation mode setting, the mode is changed to the PHOTO imageprocess setting and the code number of the current set PHOTO image process setting is displayed.(Default: 0)Enter the code number corresponding to the desired PHOTO image process setting and press [←/→]key to change the mode and write into the EEPROM.

[Operation]

20 SPF exposure correction (EXP.LEVEL SPF) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the SPF is installed.)

[Function]Used to adjust the exposure correction amount in the SPF mode. The adjustment is made by adjust-ing Vref voltage variation for the OC mode.

When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).Change the set value and press [START] key to save the setting and make a copy.

When the set value is increased, copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased, copybecomes lighter. (Adjustment range: 1 – 99)


Main code

Sub code


Mode Display item Code number Setting content Remark

γ GAMMA1 Image quality priority mode Japan default2 Toner consumption priority mode EX Japan default

AE AE0 Lead edge stop Default1 Real time process

PHOTO PHOTO1 Error diffusion process Default2 Dither process

1) Initial display <γ table setting>

2) [→] Mode selection

2) [←] Mode selection

3) [10KEY] Value input

4) [OK (ENTER)/START] Save the set value. Themachine goes to the subcode entry standby mode.

46-19 AE MODEGAMMA 2( 1-2)

46-19 AE MODEAE 0( 0-1)

46-19 AE MODEPHOTO 1( 1-2)

46-19 AE MODEAE 1( 0-1)

Mode Display item Default RemarkSPF SPF 50


46 29 Image contrast adjustment (600dpi) (GAMMA 600)

[Function]Contrast is set for each mode.

When this test command is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).

Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value.

When the set value is increased, the contrast becomes higher. When the set value is decreased, thecontrast becomes lower.

In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make higher contrast,Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become in higher contrast. When made to a lower contrast, Exp1. andExp.5 copies become lower contrast, too.


∗ No density display on LCD.


30 AE limit adjustment (AE LIMIT)

[Function]Used to set the limit value in AE and AE (toner save).Change the setting and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to write the setting into the EEPROM. Themachine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.By pressing [←/→] key, setting is changed. (Setting range: 0 – 31, Default: 0)

<Remark>

When test command 26-06 (Destination setting) or test command 46-19 Auto Exposure mode ischanged, the setting of this test command is also changed to the default in connection.


31 Image sharpness adjustment (SHARPNESS)

[Function]Used to adjust sharpening/blurring of image in each mode.

When this test command is executed, warm-up and shading are performed and the current set valueis displayed. (Default: 1)Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set conditions.To change the mode, press [←/→] key. The code number of the selected mode is dip0slayed on theLCD.


Main code

Sub code


Mode Display item Default LEDAE mode (600dpi) AE 50 COPY mode lampTEXT mode (600dpi) TEXT 50 PRINT mode lampPHOTO mode PHOTO 50 SCAN mode lampTS mode (TEXT)(600dpi) TSTXT 50 PRINT mode lamp

SCAN mode lampTS mode (AE)(600dpi) TSAE 50 COPY mode lamp

SCAN mode lamp

Mode Display item RemarkLimit value for AE AELimit value for AE (toner save) TSAE

Image quality Setting No RemarkBlurring 0

Standard 1 DefaultSharpening 2

Mode Display item Default setting LEDAE mode AE 1 COPY mode lampTEXT mode TEXT 1 PRINT mode lampPHOTO mode PHOTO 1 SCAN mode lampTS mode (TEXT) TSTXT 1 PRINT mode lamp

SCAN mode lampTS mode (AE) TSAE 1 COPY mode lamp

SCAN mode lamp


46 32 Copier color reproduction setting (COLOR REAPPEAR)

[Function]Used to set color reproduction in each mode. Colors easy to be copied and colors difficult to be copiedcan be switched.

∗ This setting has virtually no effect on black-and-white documents.

When this test command is executed, warm-up and shading are performed and the current set valueis displayed. (Default: 0)Press [START] key to make a copy under the set conditions . At that time, color components arechanged for used in copying.To change the mode, press [←/→] key. The code number of the selected mode is dip0slayed on theLCD.


39 FAX mode sharpness adjustment (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered sharpness adjustment value, and thedata of the selected mode stored on the FAX side is changed to the entered value.

[Operation]

Main code

Sub code


Set value Colors easy to be copied Colors difficult to be copied0 Purple, Blue, Red Yellow, Green, Water blue1 Water blue, Green, Blue Purple, Red, Yellow2 Yellow, Red, Green Blue, Water blue, Purple

Specification component Setting No RemarkGreen 0 DefaultRed 1Blue 2

Mode Display item Default setting LEDAE mode (including TS) AE 0 COPY mode lampTEXT mode (including TS) TEXT 0 PRINT mode lampPHOTO mode PHOTO 0 SCAN mode lamp

Sharpness adjustment value data table

When initializing each data: 1

Mode Sharpness adjustment value1: STD2: FINE3: S-FINE4: FINE/PHOTO5: S-FINE/PHOTO

1) Initial display

2) [←/→] or after 2sec

Every time when [→] key is pressed, thesecond line is changed in the sequence ofNo. 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 1.

When [←] key is pressed, the sequence isreversed.

3) Select the arrow key 1-5, and the LED of[START] key is lighted.

("ZZZZ" is the mode selected among STD,FINE, S-FINE, FINE/PHOTO, and S-FINE/PHOTO.)

("X" is the corresponding sharpness adjustmentvalue of the selected mode stored on the FAXside.)

∗ [CLEAR] key: Returns to “2)” display.

4) Enter a one-digit value (0-2) as the sharp-ness adjustment value with [10KEY].

("Y" is the entered sharpness adjustment value.)

∗ [CLEAR] key: Returns to “2)” display.




SHARPNESS SETTINGPRESS ←,→

SHARPNESS SET (1-5)1:STD

SHARPNESS SETTINGZZZZ(0-2) X

SHARPNESS SETTINGZZZZ(0-2) Y

SHARPNESS SETTING SCAN Y

SHARPNESS SETTING PRINT Y


48 01 Main scan/sub scan direction magnification ratio (COPY MAG.)

[Function]Used to adjust the magnification ratio in the main scan (front/rear) direction and sub scan direction.Enter the adjustment value with [10KEY]. Press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy.(When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the magnification ratio is increased by 0.1%.)The adjustment mode can be changed by pressing [←/→] key. (Adjustment range: 1 – 99, Default: 50)


05 SPF/RSPF mode sub scan direction magnification ratio in copying (SPF/RSPF MAG.) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the SPF/RSPF is installed.)

[Function]Used to display the current SPF/RSPF mode sub scan direction magnification ratio on the LCD. When [START] key is pressed, the entered data is acquired and saved into the EEPROM, and a copyis made. (When the set value is increased by 1, the magnification ratio is increased by 0.1%.) (Adjustment range: 1 – 99, Default: 50)

When adjusting the RSPF, use [2-SIDED COPY] key to select single/duplex after entering the onepage print mode, performing 2-page single copy.

For printing, regardless of the density mode and the density level,

Density mode = MANUALDensity level = 3

∗ When there is no document in SPF, copy is inhibited.

*1: Only when RSPF is installed. If installed, skipped.


Main code

Sub code


Mode Display item Default value LEDMain scan direction magnification ratio F-R 50 PRINT mode lampOC mode sub scan direction magnification ratio

SCAN 50 SCAN mode lamp

Mode Display item Default LEDSub scan magnification ratio adjustment on the surface of SPF/RSPF document


Sub scan magnification ratio adjustment on the surface of RSPF document *1



49 01 Download mode (DOWNLOAD MODE)

[Function]When this test command is executed, "DLOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the LCD and themachine goes into the program writing mode from PC to Flash ROM.

Use the writing tool on the PC and write the program.

During writing, the display shows as follows:

After completion of download, turn OFF/ON the power to reset.

In case of an error in download, the following message is displayed on the LCD.

To enter the download mode, there is a method to use key operations as well as to use a test com-mand. With the power OFF, press and hold [CA] + [←], turn on the power.

[Operation]

Main code

Sub code


Status Display itemDownload data receiving RECEIVINGLoader function transfer LOADER COPYINGDate delete start FLASH ERASEData write (Boot section) BOOT WRITINGData write (Program section) PROGRAM WRITINGData write (EEPROM) E2PROM WRITINGData write (LCD) LCD DATE WRITINGDuring SUM CHECK FLASH ROM SUM CHECKDuring BOOT SUM CHECK BOOT SUM CHECKDuring EEPROM SUM CHECK EEPROM SUM CHECKDownload complete DOWNLOAD COMPLETE!

Error status Display itemPC data receiving E-01 PC TRANSLoader function transfer E-02 LOADER COPYFLASH ROM delete E-03 FLASH ERASEBoot section FLASH ROM write E-04 BOOT WRITEProgram section FLASH ROM write E-05 PROGRAM WRITELoader section SUM CHECK E-06 LOADER SUMBoot section SUM CHECK E-07 BOOT SUMProgram section SUM CHECK E-08 PROGRAM SUME2PROM SUM CHECK E-09 E2PROM SUME2PROM write E-10 E2PROM WRITEE2PROM read Verify E-11 E2PROM READE2PROM collating Verify E-12 E2PROM COLLATEBoot section lens check E-13 BOOT LENGTHProgram section lens check E-14 PROGRAM LENGTHE2PROM lens check E-15 E2PROM LENGTHTotal data size check E-16 DATE SIZEIMC communication error E-17 IMC TRANSIMC FRASH ROM write E-18 IMC FLASH WRITELCD section lens check E-19 LCD DATE LENGTHLCD section FLASH ROM write E-20 LCD DATE WRITELCD section SUM CHECK E-21 LCD DATE SUM

1) Initial display

DOWNLOAD MODE


50 01 Lead edge image position (LEAD EDGE)

[Function]Used to adjust the copy image position and the lead edge void amount on copy paper. The adjust-ment is made by adjusting the image scan start position at 100% and the print start position (resistroller ON timing). When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits.(Center value: 50)

When [←/→] key is pressed, the setting mode and the display are changed.

Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy.

When the adjustment is made by the main cassette paper feed, the adjustment values of all the paperfeed ports become the same. (When the set value is increased by 1, shift is made by 0.1mm.)

(*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip.

[Adjustment procedure]1) Set the print start position (A: COPY mode lamp ON), the lead edge void amount (B: PRINT mode

lamp ON), the scan start position (C: SCAN mode lamp) to zero, and make a copy of the scale at100%.

2) Measure the image loss (Rmm) of the scale.

Set C = 10 x R (mm). (Example: Set to 40.)

When the value of C is increased by 10, the image loss is decreased by 1mm. (Default: 50)

3) Measure the distance (Hmm) from the paper lead edge to the image print start position.

Set A = 10 x H (mm). (Example: Set to 50.)

When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead edge is moved to the paper lead edge by1mm. (Default: 50).

4) Set the lead edge void amount to B = 50 (2.5mm). (Default: 50)

When the value of B is increased by 10, the void is extended by about 0.1mm. (For 25 or less,however, the void amount is regarded as 0.)

∗ The SFP adjustment is made by adjusting the SPF image scan start position after OC adjustment.∗ When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.

(Example)


Main code

Sub code


Mode Display item Default LEDPrint start position (Main cassette paper feed)


(*) Print start position (2nd cassette paper feed)


Print start position (Manual paper feed)


Image lead edge void amount DEN-A 50 PRINT mode lampImage scan start position RRC-A 50 SCAN mode lampImage rear edge void amount DEN-B 50 COPY mode lamp

PRINT mode lampSCAN mode lamp

5mm

10mm

Distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge, H = 5mm

Image loss, R = 4mm


50 06 Copy lead edge position adjustment (SPF/RSPF) (SPF/RSPF EDGE) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the SPF/RSPF is installed.)

[Function]Used to adjust the SPF copy lead edge.

When the adjustment value of the document scan position adjustment is increased by 1, the scanstart timing is advanced by 0.1mm.

The print result is shifted to the opposite direction of the scan start position.

The adjustment mode can be changed by pressing [←/→] key. (Adjustment range: 1 – 99, Default:50)

When scanning a back surface of document, the mode must be changed to operate the RSPF bypressing [2-SIDED COPY] key.

(*) : Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip.∗ When there is no document in the SPF, copy is inhibited.∗ When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.


10 Print center offset adjustment (PRT.OFF-CENTER)

[Function]Used to adjust the center offset position of copy images on copy paper and that in scanning docu-ment.When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed.Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the setting and make a copy. (When theset value is changed by 1, the center is shifted by 0.1mm.)When the adjustment value is increased, the center is shifted to right. When decreased, the center isshifted to left.The modes can be selected by pressing [←/→] key.When the set value is changed largely, the area outside the shading area may be scanned to causeblack streaks on the edges. When the RSPF is used, select the mode for use of the RSPF by [2-SIDED COPY] key.

(*) : Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip.∗ In the 2nd print center offset adjustment, print is made forcibly as 1to2/Short Edge from OC regard-

less of duplex setting.

∗ When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.


12 Document feed off-center adjustment (ORG.OFF-CENTER)

[Function]Used to adjust document scan off-center adjustment.The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [←/→] key. (Adjustment range: 1 – 99, Default:50)When the adjustment value is increased, the print result is shifted to left.

(*) : Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip.∗ When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.


Main code

Sub code


Mode Display item Default LEDFront surface document scan position adjustment


(*) Back surface document scan position adjustment


Rear edge void adjustment (SPF) END 50 SCAN mode lamp

Mode Display item Default LEDPrint center offset (Main cassette paper feed)


(*) Print center offset (2nd cassette paper feed)


Print center offset (Manual paper feed) MFT 50 COPY mode lampManual feed lamp

(*) 2nd print center offset (Main cassette paper feed)

SIDE2 50 PRINT mode lampMain cassette lamp

Mode Display item Default LEDPlaten document scan OC 50 COPY mode lamp(*) SPF document front scan SPF 50 PRINT mode lamp(*) RSPF document back scan RSPF 50 SCAN mode lamp


50 18 Memory reverse position adjustment in duplex copy (DPLX REVERSE) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON with OC or SPF set) (Executable only when the RSPF is installed.)

[Function]When this test command is executed, the current set correction value is displayed.

Enter the correction value and press [START] key to save the entered correction value. (Correctionvalue range; 1 – 99, Default: 50)

For S-D mode front surface print and print of even paged in D-S mode, reverse memory copy opera-tion is performed from the rear edge of documents.

When, therefore, the print position adjustment of output images is required, adjust as follows:

In the reverse memory coping, when the document scan is made in the arrow direction, the outputimage is printed from the rear edge of scan image,

When, therefore, the print lead edge is shifted, set the reference chart so that the reference position ison the rear edge, and use this test command to adjust the set value so that the print lead edge ismatched.

Since printing is made from the image data most lately stored in memory to the lead edge data fromthe print start position, the image lead edge adjustment is made by changing the end data positionstored in memory by the set value of this test command.

Since it is performed by changing the scan end position, the image position adjustment is made bychanging the scan end position and the end data stored in memory.

∗ The initial value of duplex setting is "1to2/Long Edge" for the duplex model, or "2to1" for the simplexmodel.



19 Duplex copy rear edge void adjustment (DPLX END EDGE) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON) (Executable only when the RSPF is installed.)

[Function]Used to adjust the rear edge void amount in duplex copy.

When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits. (Center value: 50.)The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [←/→] key. (Adjustment range; 1 – 99)

Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy. (Thepaper information is cleared for every copy.)

When the set value is increased by 1, the void amount is increased by about 0.1mm.

∗ The initial value for duplex setting is "1to2/Short Edge" for the OC/SPF setting, or "2to2" for theRSPF setting.



Main code

Sub code


*1: Only when SPF/RSPF is installed. If installed, skipped.

Mode Display item Default LEDOC memory reverse output position OC 50 COPY mode lampSPF memory reverse output position *1 SPF 50 PRINT mode lamp

Document transport direction Document transport directionScan lead edge Print lead edge

Lead edge void (1)Print start position

Scan end position(Default: Scan cut by void (1)) Rear edge void

Print rear edgeScan direction Scan rear edge

Mode Display item Default LEDPaper rear edge void amount DEN-B 50 PRINT mode lampPrint start position (Duplex back surface) RRC-D 50 SCAN mode lamp


51 02 Resist amount adjustment (RESIST ADJ.)

[Function]Used to adjust the contact pressure of the main unit resist roller and the RSPF resist roller onto paper.When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed.

The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [←/→] key.

Enter the adjustment value with [10KEY] and press [START] key to save the set value and make acopy.

(*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip.


53 08 SPF scan position automatic adjustment (SPF AUTO) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the SPF is installed.)

[Function]Place a black chart so that it covers the SPF scan glass and the OC glass together, and close the OCcover.

When this test command is executed, the current adjustment value is displayed as the initial display.

∗ Default is 1. Adjustment range is 1 – 99. Adjustment unit 1 = about 0.127mm

∗ If the values are kept as the default values, SPF scan is not performed properly. The front area ofthe proper scan position may be scanned.

In case of AUTO, press [START] key, and the mirror unit scans from the home position to the SPFscan position with the adjustment value displayed. The SPF glass cover edge position is calculatedfrom the difference between the SPFG glass cover edge and the OC side document glass CCD out-put level. If the adjustment is normal, the adjusted value is displayed. If abnormal, the error LED lightsup with the current set value displayed.

During the error LED is lighted, when [START] key is pressed again, execution is performed again.

[Operation]The operation is similar to test command 46-01. (In MANUAL)

OK/ERR display in AUTO

61 03 HSYNC output check (LSU CHK)

[Function]When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, HSYNC is performed and the polygon motor is rotated for 30sec. At that time, the COPY mode lamp is lighted for 100msec every time when HSYNC is detected.

[Operation]

Main code

Sub code


Mode Display item Default LEDMain cassette paper fed TRAY1 50 COPY mode lamp

Main cassette lamp(*) 2nd cassette paper feed TRAY2 50 COPY mode lamp

2nd cassette lampManual paper feed MFT 50 COPY mode lamp

Manual feed lamp(*) RSPF document paper feed (Front surface)

SIDE1 50 COPY mode lampPRINT mode lampSCAN mode lamp

(*) RSPF document paper feed (Back surface)

SIDE2 50 COPY mode lampPRINT mode lamp

(*) Duplex back surface DUP-2 50 PRINT mode lampSCAN mode lamp

Mode Display item Default LEDSPF scan position auto adjustment AUTO 1 COPY mode lampSPF scan position manual adjustment MANU 1 PRINT mode lamp

<When OK> <When ERR>

53-08 SPF AUTOAUTO 100% ** OK

53-08 SPF AUTOAUTO 100% ** ERR

1) Initial display

61-03 LSU CHKEXECUTING...


63 01 Shading check (SHADING CHK)

[Function]Used to display the detection level of white plate for shading.

When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the white plate for shadingand the copy lamp is lighted.

When the light quantity is stabilized, revision is made for every second, and the level of one pixel atthe center of CCD which is not corrected is detected and the value is displayed in decimal values onthe LCD. (3 digits)

[Operation]

02 Black level automatic correction (BLACK LEVEL)

[Function]Used to acquire the black level target value used for the black level adjustment of white balance.

When this test command is executed, the current correction value is displayed in 3 digits of 12bithexadecimal number.

Place the gray gradation chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) used as the correction document so that the den-sity 10 (black side) comes on the left side and that the chart is upside down at the center of the plateleft center.

When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit scans the chart and calculates thecorrection value.

After completion of correction, the corrected value is displayed on the LCD.

∗ Default: 0

∗ If the value is set to the default, operation is made with 0x60.

[Operation]

Main code

Sub code


1) Initial display

63-01 SHADING CHKEXECUTING... 000

Chart back surface

10

1) Initial display

2) [OK (ENTER)/START] Correctionstart

63-02 BLACK LEVEL 000

63-02 BLACK LEVELEXECUTING...

<During canceling - When C/CA is pressed->

After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entrystandby mode.

3) After execution

3) In case of an error


63-02 BLACK LEVEL *** OK

63-02 BLACK LEVEL *** ERR


64 01 Self print (1by2 mode) (SELF PRT.)

[Function]The status of the optical section is ignored and printing of one page is made. Also when the print com-mand is received from the host, printing is made.

When this test command is executed, warm-up is performed and the ready lamp is lighted. (Since,however, the scanner is disabled, initializing is not made.)

Enter the code number and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to start paper feed from the selectedcassette and print in the selected pattern.

∗ For 4 – 99, flip.


66 01 FAX soft SW setting (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]Use to check the FAX soft SW setting.Every time when the key is pressed, the bit on the first line is switched 0 and 1.

[Operation]

02 FAX soft SW initializing (excluding the adjustment values) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]Use to initializing FAX soft SW.

[Operation]

Main code

Sub code


Code number Pattern Display item0 1by2 1 BY 21 Grid pattern CHECK2 White paper WHITE3 Black background BLACK

1) Initial display


2) Enter a 3-digit value of soft SW No. (Toenter the fourth digit, shift to the left.), andthe press [OK (ENTER)] key.

"xxxxxxxx" is the set content.

∗ Select 2: Returns to the soft SW No. entry dis-play.

3) Select 1

4) Change with 1-8 of [10KEY] and the press[OK (ENTER)] key.

"xxxxxxxx" is the set content.

∗ Select 2: Returns to the soft SW No. entry dis-play.

5) Select 1

After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".

ENTER FAX SOFT SW. #(3 DIGITS) SW.___

No.### xxxxxxxxCHANGE? 1:YES 2:NO

No.### xxxxxxxxUSE # KEY 12345678

No.### xxxxxxxxSTORED? 1:YES 2:NO

STORED

1) Initial display

After 2sec, FAX control is terminated.

INITIALIZED


66 03 FAX PWB memory check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]Use to check the FAX PWB memory.

[Operation]

04 Signal send mode (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]Use to set the signal send mode (Max. value).

Facsimile test command design specifications.

[Operation]

Main code

Sub code


1) Initial display


Every time when [→] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1 → 2 →3 → 1.

When [←] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed.


3) [OK (ENTER)] key

4) After completion of check

• When the result is OK

• In case of sum check error

• In case of address bus checkerror

• In case of data check error

• In case of data bus checkerror

• In case of erase check error


SELECT CHECK MEMORYPRESS ←, →

SELECT MEMORY (1-3)1:DRAM

SELECT MEMORY (1-3)2:SRAM

SELECT MEMORY (1-3)3:FLASH

CHECKING MEMORY

MEMORY CHECK RESULT OK

MEMORY CHECK RESULTXXXXXXXX SUM NG

MEMORY CHECK RESULTXXXXXXXX A-BUS NG

MEMORY CHECK RESULTXXXXXXXX DATA NG

MEMORY CHECK RESULTXXXXXXXX D-BUS NG

MEMORY CHECK RESULTXXXXXXXX ERASE NG

1 NO SIGNAL 13 7200bps(V34) 25 2400bps(V27ter)2 33600bps(V34) 14 4800bps(V34) 26 300bps(FLAG)3 31200bps(V34) 15 2400bps(V34) 27 2100Hz(CED)4 28800bps(V34) 16 14400bps(V33) 28 1100Hz(CNG)5 26400bps(V34) 17 12000bps(V33) 29 300bps(V21)6 24000bps(V34) 18 14400bps(V17) 30 2100Hz(ANSam)7 21600bps(V34) 19 12000bps(V17) 31 DUMMY RING8 19200bps(V34) 20 9600bps(V17) 32 NO VOICE ANSWER9 16800bps(V34) 21 7200bps(V17) 33 NO RING BACK TONE10 14400bps(V34) 22 9600bps(V29) 34 LINE OFF HOOK11 12000bps(V34) 23 7200bps(V29) 35 LINE ON HOOK12 9600bps(V34) 24 4800bps(V27ter)

1) Initial display

2) 2-digit (1-35) with [10KEY] / [←/→] / 2sec after

Pressing [→] key or [←] key reverses the sequence.


3) [OK (ENTER)] key

Send after setting


SELECT OUTPUT SIGNAL(2 DIGITS) No.___

No. (1-35)1:NO SIGNAL

..... No. (1-35)35:LINE ON HOOK

OUTPUTING SIGNAL MAXPRESS CLEAR TO STOP


66 05 Signal send mode (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]Use to set the signal send mode (Soft SW set value).

Facsimile test command design specifications.

[Operation]

07 Image memory content print (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]Use to print the image memory content.

[Operation]

10 Image memory content clear (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]Use to clear the image memory content.

[Operation]

Main code

Sub code


1 NO SIGNAL 13 7200bps(V34) 25 2400bps(V27ter)2 33600bps(V34) 14 4800bps(V34) 26 300bps(FLAG)3 31200bps(V34) 15 2400bps(V34) 27 2100Hz(CED)4 28800bps(V34) 16 14400bps(V33) 28 1100Hz(CNG)5 26400bps(V34) 17 12000bps(V33) 29 300bps(V21)6 24000bps(V34) 18 14400bps(V17) 30 2100Hz(ANSam)7 21600bps(V34) 19 12000bps(V17) 31 DUMMY RING8 19200bps(V34) 20 9600bps(V17) 32 NO VOICE ANSWER9 16800bps(V34) 21 7200bps(V17) 33 NO RING BACK TONE10 14400bps(V34) 22 9600bps(V29) 34 LINE OFF HOOK11 12000bps(V34) 23 7200bps(V29) 35 LINE ON HOOK12 9600bps(V34) 24 4800bps(V27ter)

1) Initial display

2) 2-digit (1-35) with [10KEY] / [←/→] / 2sec after

Pressing [→] key or [←] key reverses the sequence.


3) [OK (ENTER)] key

Send after setting


SELECT OUTPUT SIGNAL(2 DIGITS) No.___

No. (1-35)1:NO SIGNAL

..... No. (1-35)35:LINE ON HOOK

OUTPUTING SIGNAL SSWPRESS CLEAR TO STOP

• When print is allowed

After completion of printing,FAX control is terminated.

• When there is no print data

After 2 sec, FAX control is terminated.

• When print is inhibited

After 2 sec, FAX control is terminated.

PRINT STORED NO DATA CAN NOT PRINT

• When there are some print data

After completion of memory clear, the buzzersounds.

Remains unchanged until the power is turnedoff.

• When there are no print data

After completion of memory clear


CLEAR IMAGE MEMORY

CLEAREDPLEASE POWER OFF

CLEAR IMAGE MEMORY

CLEARED


66 11 300bps signal send (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]Use to set the 300bps signal send (Max. value).

1: NO SIGNAL2: 111113: 111104: 000005: 0101016: 00001

[Operation]

12 300bps signal send (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]Use to set the 300bps signal send (Soft SW set value).

1: NO SIGNAL2: 111113: 111104: 000005: 0101016: 00001

[Operation]

Main code

Sub code


1) Initial display


Every time when [→] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1 → 2 →3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1.



3) [OK (ENTER)] key


SELECT SIGNALPRESS ←, →

SELECT SIGNAL (1-6)1:NO SIGNAL

..... SELECT SIGNAL (1-6)6:00001

OUTPUTING SIGNAL MAXPRESS CLEAR TO STOP

1) Initial display


Every time when [→] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1 → 2 →3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1.



3) [OK (ENTER)] key


SELECT SIGNALPRESS ←, →

SELECT SIGNAL (1-6)1:NO SIGNAL

..... SELECT SIGNAL (1-6)6:00001

OUTPUTING SIGNAL SSWPRESS CLEAR TO STOP


66 13 Dial test (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]Use to the dial test.

[Operation]

17 DTMF signal send (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]Use to set the DTMF signal send (Max. value).

[Operation]

Main code

Sub code


Dial test (PULSE)

1) Initial display

∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is termi-nated.

2) Select 1

3) Enter the make time in 2 digits.

XXXX: Default

∗ After deleting with [CLEAR] key,input can be made.

4) [OK (ENTER)] key

"yy" is the selected pulse 10 or 20.

"xx" is the input value.

∗ Select 2: Returns to “2)” display.

5) Select 1

Switched to 10/20PPS set withpulse selection inside.

6) After setting

7) After completion of sending


8) Select 1


SELECT SIGNAL1:PULSE 2:DTMF

INPUT MAKE TIME(0-15) __

INPUT DIAL #XXXX

SEND yyPPS xxms1:YES 2:NO

SENDING yyPPS xxms

TERMINATE ?1:YES 2:NO

TERMINATED

Dial test (DTMF)

1) Initial display


2) Select 2

↓ Select 2

3) Select 1 ↓

↓ Select 2

4) Select 1 ↓

XXXX: Default

∗ After deleting with [CLEAR] key, input can be made.

4) [OK (ENTER)] key

"xx" indicates HI, and "yy" indicates Low Soft SW.


5) Select 1

HI/LO is selected with the signal level inside.

6) After setting the signal send level

7) After completion of sending


8) Select 1


SELECT SIGNAL1:PULSE 2:DTMF

SELECT HIGH LEVEL1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW.

↓ INPUT VALUE(0-15) __

SELECT LOW LEVEL1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW.

↓ INPUT VALUE(0-15) __

INPUT DIAL #XXXX

H:xx L:yy1:YES 2:NO

SENDING DTMF

TERMINATE ?1:YES 2:NO

TERMINATED

1) Initial display


2) [10KEY] input

The content selected with signal send levelselection is set inside.

3) Communication is started after setting thesignal send level.


INPUT DIAL #SENDING SIGNAL MAXPRESS CLEAR TO STOP

AR-M1
50/M155/M155X TEST COMMAND, TROU BLE CODES 10 - 35

66 18 DTMF signal send (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]Use to set the DTMF signal send (Soft SW set value).

[Operation]

21 FAX information print (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]Use to print the FAX information.

[Operation]

24 FAST SRAM clear (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]Use to clear the FAST SRAM.

[Operation]

30 TEL/LIU status change check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]Use to check the TEL/LIU status change.

[Operation]

Main code

Sub code


1) Initial display


2) [10KEY] input

The content selected with signal send levelselection is set inside.

3) Communication is started after setting thesignal send level.


INPUT DIAL #SENDING SIGNAL SSWPRESS CLEAR TO STOP

1) Initial display


Every time when [→] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of 1 → 2 → 3 →1.



3) [OK (ENTER)] key

• When print is allowed

After completion of printing,FAX control is terminated.

• When print is inhibited


SELECT REPORT (1-3)PRESS ←, →

SELECT REPORT (1-3)1:USER SW. LIST

SELECT REPORT (1-3)2:SOFT SW. LIST

SELECT REPORT (1-3)3:PROTOCOL

PRINT STORED CAN NOT PRINT

1) Initial display 2) After completion of clearing


CLEAR FAST SRAM CLEARED

1) Initial display

↑

The display is switched every 2sec.

↓


HS2 :xxx HS1 :xxxRHS :xxx EXHS:xxx

CHECKINGPRESS CLEAR TO STOP


66 32 Receive data check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]Use to check the receive data.

[Operation]

33 Signal detection check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]Use to check the signal detection.

[Operation]

34 Communication time measurement (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]Use to measurement the communication time.

[Operation]

37 Speaker sound volume setting (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]Use to set the speaker sound volume.

1: NO SOUND2: LOW3: MID4: HIGH

[Operation]

Main code

Sub code


1) Initial display 2) After completion of reception

"xx" is "OK" or "NG" depending on the checkresult.


RECEIVING RESULT xx

1) Initial display

When a signal is detected, the display is changed from NONE to the following.

CI/CNG/CED/BT/DT/Flag/SDT/DTMF


CHECKING NONEPRESS CLEAR TO STOP

1) Initial display

"xx:xx:xx:xxx" indicates o'clock, minute, second, millisecond.


COMM. TIMExx:xx:xx:xxx msec

1) Initial display


Every time when [→] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of 1 → 2 → 3 →4 → 1.



3) [OK (ENTER)] key

xxx: Set content


SELECT SPEEKER VOL.PRESS ←, →

SELECT (1-4)1:NO SOUND

SELECT (1-4)2:LOW

.....

STOREDxxx


66 38 Time setting/check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]Use to check the time setting.

[Operation]

41 CI signal check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]Use to check the CI signal.

When CI signal is detected, OFF → ON.

[Operation]

Main code

Sub code


1) Initial display


2) Select 1

"xxxx.xx.xx(xxx)" is the current value. (No revi-sion of display)

3) Select 1

∗ Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display".

4) Enter the year in 4 digits.

5) Enter the month in 2 digits.

6) Enter the day in 2 digits.

"xxxx.xx.xx(xxx) is the entered value.


7) Select 1


2) Select 2

"xx:xx" is the current value.

3) Select 1


4) Enter o'clock in 2 digits.

5) Enter minute in 2 digits.

"xx:xx" is the current value.


6) Select 1


SELECT TO SET1:DATE 2:TIME

xxxx.xx.xx(xxx)CHANGE? 1:YES 2:NO

INPUT YEAR(4 DIGITS)____.__.__

INPUT MONTH(1-12) 1998.__.__

INPUT DAY(1-31) 1998.01.__

xxxx.xx.xx(xxx)STORED? 1:YES 2:NO

STORED

xx:xxCHANGE? 1:YES 2:NO

INPUT HOUR(0-24) __:__

INPUT MINUTE(00-59) 01:__

xx:xxSTORED? 1:YES 2:NO

STORED

1) Initial display


CHECKING CI:OFFPRESS CLEAR TO STOP


5. Trouble codesA. Trouble codes list

B. Details of trouble codes

Main code

Sub code

Details of trouble

E1 00 IMC communication trouble10 IMC trouble13 IMC flash ROM error16 IMC DIMM memory read/write check error81 IMC communication interface error (parity)82 IMC communication interface error (Overrun)84 IMC communication interface error (Framing)

E7 02 LSU trouble10 Shading trouble (Black correction)11 Shading trouble (White correction)16 Abnormal laser output

F2 04 Improper cartridge (Destination error, life cycle error)F5 02 Copy lamp lighting abnormalityF6 10 FAX board troubleH2 00 Thermistor openH3 00 Heat roller high temperature detectionH4 00 Heat roller low temperature detectionL1 00 Feeding is not completed within the specified time after

starting feeding. (The scan head locking switch is locked)L3 00 Scanner return troubleL4 01 Main motor lock detectionL6 10 Polygon motor lock detectionU1 03 FAX board battery errorU2 04 EEPROM read/write error (Serial communication error)

11 Counter check sum error (EEPROM)40 CRUM chip communication error

U9 99 Operation panel language error

Main code

Sub code

Details of trouble

E1 00 Content IMC communication troubleDetail An abnormality occurs in communication

between the CPU and the IMC.Cause IMC – CPU signal line abnormality

IMC Memory defect/data abnormalityCheck and remedy

Replace the MCU PWB with new one.

10 Content IMC troubleDetail An abnormality occurs in the IMC.Cause USB chip error/CODEC error on the IMC.Check and remedy

Replace the MCU PWB with a new one.

13 Content IMC flash ROM errorDetail An abnormality occurs in the IMC flash ROM.Cause IMC abnormalityCheck and remedy

Replace the MCU PWB with a new one.If downloading of the program is abnormally terminated, it may cause an error. Download the program again to avoid this.

E1 16 Content IMC DIMM memory read/write check errorDetail An installation error occurs in the IMC memory

module.An error occurs during access to the IMC memory.

Cause Improper installation of the IMC memory module.IMC memory module abnormalityIMC memory contact abnormalityIMC abnormality.

Check and remedy

Check installation of the memory module.Replace the memory module.Replace the MCU PWB with a new one.

81 Content IMC communication interface error (parity)Detail A parity error occurs in communication between

the CPU and the IMC.Cause IMC memory defect/data abnormalityCheck and remedy

Check the memory of the IMC.Replace the MCU PWB with new one.

82 Content IMC communication interface error (Overrun)Detail An overrun error occurs in communication

between the CPU and the IMC.Cause IMC memory defect/data abnormality.Check and remedy

Check the memory of the IMC.Replace the MCU PWB with new one.

84 Content IMC communication interface error (Framing)Detail A framing error occurs in communication

between the CPU and the IMC.Cause IMC memory defect/data abnormality.Check and remedy

Check the memory of the IMC.

E7 02 Content LSU troubleDetail The BD signal from the LSU cannot be detected

in a certain cycle. (Always OFF or always ON)Cause LSU connector or LSU harness defect or

disconnectionPolygon motor rotation abnormalityLaser beams are not generated.MCU PWB abnormality.

Check and remedy

Check connection of the LSU connector.Execute TC 61-03 to check the LSU operations.Check that the polygon motor rotates normally.Check that the laser emitting diode generates laser beams.Replace the LSU unit.Replace the MCU PWB.

10 Content Shading trouble (Black correction)Detail The CCD black scan level is abnormal when the

shading.Cause Improper connection of the CCD unit flat cable

CCD unit abnormalityMCU PWB abnormality

Check and remedy

Check connection of the CCD unit flat cable.Check the CCD unit.

Main code

Sub code

Details of trouble


E7 11 Content Shading trouble (White correction)Detail The CCD white scan level is abnormal when the

shading.Cause Improper connection of the CCD unit flat cable

Dirt on the mirror, the lens, and the reference white plateCopy lamp lighting abnormalityCCD unit abnormalityMCU PWB abnormality(When occurred in the SPF scan position.)Improper installation of the mirror unit

Check and remedy

Clean the mirror, lens, and the reference white plate.Check the light quantity and lighting status of the copy lamp (TC 05-03).Check the MCU PWB.

16 Content Abnormal laser outputDetail When the laser output is stopped, HSYNC is

detected.Cause Laser abnormality

MCU PWB abnormality.Check and remedy

Check the laser emitting diode operation.Replace the MCU PWB.

F2 04 Content Improper cartridge (Destination error, life cycle error)

Detail The destination of the main unit differs from that of the CRUM.The life cycle information is other than "FFh" (Not used).

Cause CRUM chip troubleImproper developing unit

Check and remedy

Replace the CRUM chip.Replace the developing unit.

F5 02 Content Copy lamp lighting abnormalityDetail The copy lamp does not turn on.Cause Copy lamp abnormality

Copy lamp harness abnormalityCCD PWB harness abnormality.

Check and remedy

Use TC 5-3 to check the copy lamp operations.When the copy lamp lights up.Check the harness and the connector between the CCD unit and the MCU PWB.When the copy lamp does not light up.Check the harness and the connector between the copy lamp unit and the MCU PWB.Replace the copy lamp unit.Replace the MCU PWB.

F6 10 Content FAX board troubleDetail Communication trouble between MCU and FAX

control PWBCause FAX control PWB connector disconnection

Defective harness between FAX control PWB and MCU PWBMotherboard connector pin breakageFAX control PWB ROM error/Data errorIC on FAX PWB causes abnormality

Check and remedy

Check connector/harness of FAX control PWB and MCU PWB.Check the grounding of the copier.Check FAX control PWB ROM.Replace the FAX PWB.

Main code

Sub code

Details of trouble

H2 00 Content Thermistor openDetail The thermistor is open.

The fusing unit is not installed.Cause Thermistor abnormality

Control PWB abnormalityFusing section connector disconnectionThe fusing unit is not installed.

Check and remedy

Check the harness and the connector between the thermistor and the PWB.Use TC 14 to clear the self diagnostic display.

H3 00 Content Heat roller high temperature detectionDetail The fusing temperature exceeds 240°C.Cause Thermistor abnormality

Control PWB abnormalityFusing section connector disconnection.

Check and remedy

Use TC 5-02 to check the heater lamp blinking operation.When the lamp blinks normally.Check the thermistor and its harness.Check the thermistor input circuit on the control PWB.When the lamp keeps ON.Check the power PWB and the lamp control circuit on the MCU PWB.Use TC 14 to clear the self diagnostic display.

H4 00 Content Heat roller low temperature detectionDetail The fusing temperature does not reach 185°C

within 27 sec of turning on the power, or the fusing temperature keeps at 140°C.

Cause Thermistor abnormalityHeater lamp abnormalityThermostat abnormalityControl PWB abnormality

Check and remedy

Use TC 5-02 to check the heater lamp blinking operation.When the lamp blinks normally.Check the thermistor and its harness.Check the thermistor input circuit on the control PWB.When the lamp does not light up.Check for disconnection of the heater lamp and the thermostat. Check the interlock switch.Check the power PWB and the lamp control circuit on the MCU PWB.Use TC 14 to clear the self diagnostic display.

Main code

Sub code

Details of trouble


L1 00 Content Feeding is not completed within the specified time after starting feeding. (The scan head locking switch is locked)

Detail The white area and the black marking on the shading plate are used to obtain the difference in the CCD level values for judgment of lock. When the difference in the levels of which and black is small, it is judged that the black mark could not be scanned by lock and the trouble code “L1” is displayed.

Cause The scan head is locked by the lock switch.Mirror unit abnormalityThe scanner wire is disconnected.The origin detection sensor abnormalityMirror motor harness abnormality

Check and remedy

Check to confirm that the scan head lock switch is released.Use TC 1-1 to check the mirror reciprocating operations.When the mirror does not feed.Check for disconnection of the scanner wire.Check the harness and the connector between the mirror motor and the MCU PWB.Replace the mirror unit.Replace the MCU PWB.When the mirror does feed.Use TC 1-2 to check the mirror home position sensor.

L3 00 Content Scanner return troubleDetail When the mirror base is returned for the

specified time (6 sec) in mirror initializing after turning on the power, the mirror home position sensor (MHPS) does not turn ON. Or when the mirror base is returned for the specified time (about 6 sec) after start of copy return, the mirror home position sensor (MHPS) does not turn ON.

Cause Mirror unit abnormalityScanner wire disconnectionOrigin detection sensor abnormalityMirror motor harness abnormality

Check and remedy

Use TC 1-1 to check the mirror reciprocating operations.When the mirror does not return.Check for disconnection of the scanner wire.Check the harness and the connector between the mirror motor and the MCU PWB.Replace the mirror unit.Replace the MCU PWB.When the mirror does feed.Use TC 1-2 to check the mirror home position sensor.

L4 01 Content Main motor lock detectionDetail When the main motor encoder pulse is not

detected for 100 msec.Cause Main motor unit abnormality

Improper connection or disconnection the main motor and the harness.MCU PWB abnormality

Check and remedy

Use TC 25-01 to check the main motor operations.Check connection of the main motor harness/connector.Replace the main motor.Replace the MCU PWB.

Main code

Sub code

Details of trouble

L6 10 Content Polygon motor lock detectionDetail The lock signal (specified rpm signal) does not

return within a certain time (about 20 sec) from starting the polygon motor rotation.

Cause Polygon motor unit abnormalityImproper connection or disconnection of the polygon motor and the harness.MCU PWB abnormality

Check and remedy

Use TC 61-1 to check the polygon motor operations.Check connection of the polygon motor harness/connector.Replace the polygon motor.Replace the MCU PWB.

U1 03 Content FAX board battery errorDetails The SRAM backup battery voltage on FAX

PWB falls.Cause The SRAM backup battery voltage on FAX

PWB falls.Check and remedy

Check voltage of the SRAM back up battery.Replace the battery.

U2 04 Content EEPROM read/write error (Serial communication error)

Detail EEPROM access process errorCause EEPROM abnormalityCheck and remedy

Check that the EEPROM is properly set.Use TC 16 to cancel the trouble.Replace the MCU PWB.

11 Content Counter check sum error (EEPROM)Detail Check sum error of the counter area in the

EEPROMCause EEPROM abnormalityCheck and remedy

Check that the EEPROM is properly set.Use TC 16 to cancel the trouble.Replace the MCU PWB.

40 Content CRUM chip communication errorDetail An error occurs in MCU-CRUM chip

communication.Cause CRUM chip trouble

Defective contact of developing unitMCU PWB trouble

Check and remedy

Replace the CRUM chip.Check installation of the developing unit.Cancel the operation with TC16.Replace the MCU PWB.

U9 99 Content Operation panel language errorDetail There is no language file.

The language file is destroyed. Cause Language file abnormality

MCU PWB abnormalityCheck and remedy

MCU firmware downloadReplace the MCU PWB.

Main code

Sub code

Details of trouble


AR-M150/M155/M155X MAINTENANCE 11 - 1

[11] MAINTENANCE

1. Maintenance table: Check (Clean, adjust, or replace when required.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust : Lubricate

2. Maintenance display system

3. Remaining toner indication

• The remaining toner indication is based on the number of revolutions of the toner motor.

• The toner END indication appears when the END is detected by the toner sensor.

Section Parts 25K 50K 75K 100K 125K RemarkDeveloping Developer

DV bladeDV side seal (F/R)

Process peripheral Drum

Toner Life 8KRemaining quantity NEAR EMPTY

About 10%EMPTY

LED ON FlashMachine Operation allowed Stop

Developer Life 25KLED ON at 25K of the developer count.Machine Selection is available between Not Stop and Stop by Service Simulation (SIM 26-37) Setup.

(If Stop is selected, the LED will flash and stop at 25K.)∗ Default: Not Stop∗ Clear: SIM 24-06

Maintenance LED Selection is available among 25K, 13K, 9K, 6K, 3K, and free (no lighting) with SIM 21-1.∗ Default: 25K∗ Clear: SIM 20-1

Machine Not stop.

TONER FULL

Remaining toner indicationDisplay for users

100%

75%

50%

25%

Lo

LOW LEVEL

100-90% 89-75% 74-50% 49-25% 24-10% 10% 10 sheets

TONER CARTRIDGEIS NEAR EMPTY

REPLACE THETONER CARTRIDGE

Displayed on the LCD. Displayed on the LCD.

[12] USER PROGRAM

The user settings consist of the following items.

1. User programsA. Copy mode

Programnumber

Program nameSetting codes

(factory default setting appears in bold)

Explanation

1 AUTO CLEAR 1: 10 SEC.2: 30 SEC.3: 60 SEC.4: 90 SEC.5: 120 SEC.6: OFF

• Auto clear time automatically returns the copy settings to the initial settings if no keys are pressed for a preset period of time following the end of a copy job.

• This program is used to select the period of time. Auto clear time can also be disabled.

2 PREHEAT MODE 1: 30 SEC.2: 1 MIN.3: 5 MIN.4: 30 MIN.5: 60 MIN.6: 120 MIN.7: 240 MIN.

• This function automatically switches the machine to a low power consumption state if the set duration of time elapses without the machine being used when the power is on. The power save indicator lights up, however, the keys on the operation panel can be used. Normal operation automatically resumes when a key on the operation panel is pressed, an original is placed, a print job is received.

3 AUTO SHUT-OFF 1: ON2: OFF

• Use this setting to enable or disable auto power shut-off mode.

4 AUTO SHUT-OFF TIME

1: 5 MIN.2: 30 MIN.3: 60 MIN.4: 120 MIN.5: 240 MIN.

• This function automatically switches the machine to a state that consumes even less power than preheat mode if the set duration of time elapses without the machine being used when the power is on. All lights except the power save indicator go off. To resume normal operation, press the [START] key. Normal operation also resumes automatically when a print job is received or scanning is begun from a computer. While in auto power shut-off mode, no keys (except the [START] key) can be used.

5 STREAM FEEDING 1: ON2: OFF

• When copying using the SPF/RSPF, while "SET ORIGINALS FOR STREAM FEEDING." appears in the display after an original has been scanned (about 5 seconds), a subsequent original can be placed and automatically fed into the machine.

6 LAYOUT IN 2IN1 1: PATTERN 12: PATTERN 2

• Use this setting to select the layout pattern when two original pages are copied onto a single sheet of paper.

7 OFFSET FUNCTION

1: ON2: OFF

• When enabled, this function offsets the position in the paper output tray of sets of copies during copy job, and print jobs when using the printer function.

8 ROTATE ORIG. IMAGE

1: ON2: OFF

• When two-sided copying is performed, this function rotates the image on the back of the original. This is convenient when binding the copies at the top (tablet binding).

9 AE/TEXT RESOLUTION

1: 300dpi2: 600dpi

• This setting is used to change the copy resolution in AUTO and TEXT mode from 600 x 300 dpi to 600 x 600 dpi (high-quality mode). Scanning is slower when high-quality mode is used.

10 2-SIDED COPY MODE (AR-M155/M155X)

1: HI-SPEED2: NORMAL

• If the memory fills up when two-sided copying is performed, "NORMAL" can be selected to make copying possible. However, "NORMAL" results in a slower copying speed. Normally "HI-SPEED" is selected to enable fast two-sided copying.

11 MARGIN WIDTH 1: 5mm (1/4")2: 10mm (1/2")3: 15mm (3/4")4: 20mm (1")

• Use this setting to set the margin width.

12 MEM. FOR PRINTER

1: 30%2: 40%3: 50%4: 60%5: 70%

• Use this to change the proportion of machine memory used for printer mode.

13 AUTO KEY REPEAT 1: ON2: OFF

• Use this setting to select whether or not holding down a key causes repeated input of the key. For keys that normally cause a set value to increase when held down (for example, holding down the [<] key [v] or [>] key [^]), this program can be used to have the set value not change when the key is held down.

14 KEY PRESS TIME 1: NORMAL2: 0.5 SEC.3: 1.0 SEC.4: 1.5 SEC.5: 2.0 SEC.

• Use this setting to select how long a key must be pressed for the input to be accepted. By selecting a longer time, you can prevent settings from being changed by the accidental pressing of a key.

AR-M150/M155/M155X USER PROGRAM 12 - 1

B. Print mode

*1: The scanning speed increases when the USB 2.0 mode is set to "HI-SPEED", however, the printing speed does not increase considerably.

*2: When the 250-sheet paper feed unit is installed.

15 KEY TOUCH SOUND

1: LOW2: HIGH3: OFF

• This sets the volume of beep signals.

16 SOUND AT DEFAULT

1: ON2: OFF

• Use this to sound a beep when a base setting is selected.

17 TONER SAVE MODE

1: ON2: OFF

• This mode reduces toner usage by about 10% when copying. Toner save mode is effective when the exposure mode is AUTO or TEXT.

18 AE LEVEL ADJUST 1: SPF/RSPF2: DOCUMENT GLASS

• This is used to adjust the exposure level.• The automatic exposure level can be adjusted separately for the document glass

and the SPF/RSPF.• The factory default setting for the exposure level is "center".

19 LANGUAGE 1: AMERICAN ENGLISH2: ENGLISH3: FRENCH4: SPANISH

::

This is used to set the language used in the display.

20 RESET FACTORY 1: Yes2: No

This is used to return all settings to the factory default settings.

21 SORT AUTO SELECT

1: ON2: OFF

Use this setting to enable or disable sort auto select mode.

Programnumber



Explanation

Programnumber



Explanation

1 FORCED OUTPUT 1: ON2: OFF

When this function is enabled, printing in printer mode will automatically continue using a different size of paper if the specified size of paper runs out in all trays. This feature does not function in copy mode.

2 USB 2.0 MODE SWITCH *1

1: FULL-SPEED2: HI-SPEED

This sets the USB 2.0 data transfer speed. To obtain the fastest speed when using the USB 2.0 connector, first verify that your computer meets the system requirements (operating system and driver), and then use this program to change the USB 2.0 mode to "Hi-Speed". Note that the setting should not be changed while running a TWAIN driver. (For the system requirements.)

3 AUTO TRAY SWITCH*2

1: ON2: OFF

If the paper runs out during printing and there is paper of the same size in another tray, this function automatically switches to that tray (excluding the bypass tray). The function can be disabled.


2. Selecting a setting for a user program

1) Press the [MENU] key and then press the [OK (ENTER)] key.

In printer mode, the user programs are accessed by simply press-ing the [MENU] key.

2) Press the [<] key [v] or [>] key [^] to select the item that you wish toconfigure in the USER PROGRAM items, and then press the [OK(ENTER)] key.

• You can also select a program by directly entering the programnumber with the numeric keys.

3) Press the [<] key [v] or [>] key [^] to change the setting of theselected item.

NOTE:

• If you mistakenly select the wrong item, press the [CLEAR] key [C]and repeat the procedure from step 2).

• To cancel a setting for a user program, press the [MENU] key.

4) Press the [OK (ENTER)] key.

Your selection appears briefly and then the previous screenappears.

NOTE:

When "AE LEVEL ADJUST" is selected in the user programs and the[OK (ENTER)] key is pressed, the automatic exposure adjustmentscreen appears. Adjust the exposure and press the [OK (ENTER)] key.

(AR-M150/M155 (Europe)) (AR-M155 (Australia)/M155X)



1 1 22 2

2 1 1

1,2,3,1,2,3,

SP. FUNC

AUTO

ZOOM

OK

MAIN MENU1:USER PROGRAM

MAIN MENU1:USER PROGRAM

1 1 22 2

2 1 1

1,2,3,1,2,3,

SP. FUNC

AUTO

ZOOM

OK

USER PROGRAM2:PREHEAT MODE

USER PROGRAM2:PREHEAT MODE

1 1 22 2

2 1 1

1,2,3,1,2,3,

SP. FUNC

AUTO

ZOOM

OK

PREHEAT MODE1:30 SEC.

PREHEAT MODE1:30 SEC.

Audible signals (key entry beep, invalid key beep, base setting beep)

The machine sounds three different types of beep signals: a keyentry beep that sounds when a valid key is pressed, an invalid keybeep that sounds when an invalid key is pressed, and a base settingbeep that sounds when a setting is the same as the base setting(base settings are explained below). The base setting beep is initiallydisabled. If you wish to enable the base setting beep, see "SOUNDAT DEFAULT". If you wish to change the volume of the beep signalsor disable them, see "KEY TOUCH SOUND".

The beep patterns of each type of beep signal are as follows:

Key entry beep: One beepInvalid key beep: Two beeps

Base setting beep: Three beeps

Base settings

The base settings are preset standard selections for each copy set-ting. The base settings are as follows:

Copy ratio: 100%Light and Dark level: center

Paper feed location: Tray 1 (Upper paper tray)

AUTO/TEXT/PHOTO: AUTO


[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION

1. Block diagramA. Overall block diagram

Car

riag

e U

nit

Opt

iona

l

CC

D P

WB

12V

12V

Reg

A5V

3.

3V

R G8b

its (

MS

B/L

SB

)O

ptio

nal

BS

PF

Mot

or5V

Spe

aker

(Pow

er S

uppl

y un

it)M

echa

nica

l Loa

d

FA

X o

nly

(Opt

iona

l)M

PF

S,R

RS

,CP

FS

1M

CU

-PW

B(S

PF

UN

IT S

GS

, SR

RC

, SP

US

, SP

PS

,4M

bor

8M

b (C

ount

er)

MC

NT

256M

bx1

or 1

6Mb

3.3V

D[7

..0]

RD

IEE

E 1

284

I/FC

SIN

TS

enso

r/S

W

(Ele

ctor

ical

det

ecto

r/S

W/S

enso

r)U

AR

TC

PU

IN

TE

RR

UP

TP

rinte

r C

LK(1

6.15

11M

Hz)

SP

PD

3.3V

CP

U I/

O

Sca

nner

CLK

(48M

Hz)

16.1

511M

Hz

12M

Hz

Inte

rlock

SW

Cas

sette

det

ecto

rX

2D

rum

Initi

al d

etec

tor

PP

D1

PO

DA

[19…

1]

O

PE

PW

BM

FD

Dup

lex

Mot

orP

PD

2D

[15…

0]S

DO

D1M

bit

SP

OD

PS

L LE

D

Shi

fter

Mot

orN

ote:

Ene

rgy-

savi

ng 1

W c

orre

spon

denc

e)

8Mbi

t8b

it

Opt

iona

l

I2C

Bus

8b

it2K

byte

FA

X O

PE

PW

BB

uzze

r

Fan

Mot

or (

1spe

ed)

2nd

Cas

sette

Mai

n M

otor

Ton

er M

otor

Mirr

or M

otor

(Opt

iona

l)

Pol

ygon

Mec

hani

cal l

oad

Mot

orC

PF

S2

Sen

sor/

SW

PA

PD

,PP

D3,

PD

2,C

ED

2

AC

Cod

e

KR

ON

OS

AS

IC

(296

pin)

CP

UH

8S/2

321

(19.

6608

MH

z)

I E E E 1 2 8 4

LSU

EE

PR

OM

SD

RA

M

16M

byte

Res

et IC

S

RA

M

Driv

er

Fla

sh R

OM

AF

E(A

D98

26)

C D S

A G C

M P XA

D 16

bits

CC

D D

river

CC

FL

x 2

Lam

pIn

vert

er

HO

ME

PO

SIT

ION

SE

NS

OR

CC

D(u

PD

8861

)

CP

U C

LK(1

9.66

08M

Hz)

Sys

tem

Res

et

SS

CG

PMD

Driv

er

LED

Driv

erLE

DC

opie

r 11

pcs

HC

151

KE

Y M

atrix

Cop

ier

24pc

s

LVC

1284

ST

AR

T K

EY

P

OW

ER

SU

PP

LY /P

OF

F,H

L,P

RF

W3.

3V,5

VE

N,5

V,2

4V

HV

U

TC

, GR

ID, M

C, B

IAS

PM

CLK

PS

W

KE

YIN

SE

LIN

1,2,

3

OP

-CLK

OP

-LA

TC

HO

P-D

AT

A

PS

L

MH

PS

Driv

er

Driv

er

/MMRDY

/MMD

PW

M

0 -

24V

HC

151

DC

-DC

Imag

e B

US

(PI-

Bus

)Im

age

BU

S(P

O-B

us)

O

A98

2

SD

RA

MF

lash

RO

M

8 8

KE

YS

CA

N1-

3

ISP

1581

USB2.0High-speed

P-B

us

LCD

(2 x

20)

FA

X I

/F

HC

238

(3 to

8 d

ecod

e)

EE

PR

OM

(CR

UM

)

LCD

ELC

D R

SLC

D R

/W(T

BD

)LC

D D

B7-

4

FA

XM

odem

/ LI

U P

CB

A

Driv

er

LCX

574

LAS

ER

Net

wor

k B

OX

RJ4

5(N

/Wco

nnec

-to

r)

US

BD

C A

dapt

er

KE

Y M

atrix

21 p

cs

LED

3 pc

s

AR-M150/M155/M155X ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 1

2. Circuit descriptionsA. Main PWB (MCU)

(1) GeneralThe MCU PWB is composed of:

• CPU peripheral section which performs mechanical sequencecontrol, U/I, and each function job management.The CPU connects with the ASIC and memory by use of the systembus and performs jog management and sequence control of thewhole engine.

• Image process ASIC which performs image process, CCD control,LSU control, and print control.

• OA982 peripheral section which performs E-Sort and FAX control.The OA982 performs image data input/output with the ASIC,SDRAM memory management, and communication with USB2.0devices.

• I/F section for USB2.0 and IEEE1284 control. (For the AL series,IEEE1284 is not available.)

• Motor control circuit

• Mechanical load, sensor I/O circuit

It performs control and management of the process, the transportloads, the fusing, the optical, and the operation panel sections for exe-cuting a series of copy/print/scan operations.

(2) CPU signal table (H8S/2321)

PIN No.

Signal codeInput/Output

Operating

1 /CS1 Output SRAM chip select2 /CS0 Output Flash ROM chip select3 GND DGND4 GND DGND5 Vcc CPU3.3V6 A0 Output Address bus7 A1 Output Address bus8 A2 Output Address bus9 A3 Output Address bus

10 GND DGND11 A4 Output Address bus12 A5 Output Address bus13 A6 Output Address bus14 A7 Output Address bus15 A8 Output Address bus16 A9 Output Address bus17 A10 Output Address bus18 A11 Output Address bus19 GND DGND20 A12 Output Address bus21 A13 Output Address bus22 A14 Output Address bus23 A15 Output Address bus24 A16 Output Address bus25 A17 Output Address bus26 A18 Output Address bus27 A19 Output Address bus28 GND DGND29 A20 Pull-Up30 PSW Interruption

level inputPrint SW

31 SPPD Interruption level input

SPF paper sensor

32 CCD_TG Interruption level input

CCD horizontal sync signal

33 MHPS Interruption level input

Mirror Home Position

34 /CPUSYNC Interruption level input

Horizontal sync (ASIC)

35 GND DGND36 GND DGND37 FW Interruption

level inputZero cross signal

38 ARB_INT Interruption level input

ASIC interruption

39 Vcc CPU3.3V40 D0 Data I/O Data bus41 D1 Data I/O Data bus42 D2 Data I/O Data bus43 D3 Data I/O Data bus44 GND DGND45 D4 Data I/O Data bus46 D5 Data I/O Data bus47 D6 Data I/O Data bus48 D7 Data I/O Data bus49 D8 Data I/O Data bus50 D9 Data I/O Data bus51 D10 Data I/O Data bus52 D11 Data I/O Data bus53 GND DGND54 D12 Data I/O Data bus55 D13 Data I/O Data bus56 D14 Data I/O Data bus57 D15 Data I/O Data bus58 Vcc CPU3.3V59 POFF Output Shut off control60 TxD1 Output For debug61 SDA Output EEPROM Data bus62 SCL Output EEPROM clock63 LCDRS Output LCD control64 LCDE Output LCD control65 GND DGND66 CS4 (FAX) Chip select (FAX)67 GND DGND68 GND DGND69 RY/BY Input Flash Busy signal70 LCDDB4 Output LCD control71 LCDDB5 Output LCD control72 BZR Output Buzzer signal73 LCDDB7 Output LCD control74 LCDDB6 Output LCD control75 Reset OUT1 Output Reset signal76 DMT0 Output Duplex Motor signal77 DMT1 Output Duplex Motor signal78 DMT2 Output Duplex Motor signal79 DMT3 Output Duplex Motor signal80 WDTOVF Output NC Pull-Up81 /RES Input Reset82 NMI Output NC Pull-Up83 STBY Output NC Pull-Up84 Vcc CPU3.3V85 XTAL Input Clock86 EXTAL Output Clock87 GND DGND88 CPUCLK Output NC89 Vcc CPU3.3V90 PRINTST Output Print start signal91 /RD Output Read signal92 /HWR Output Write signal (High address)93 /LWR Output Write signal (Low address)94 SELIN3 Output HC151 select signal 95 SELIN2 Output HC151 select signal96 SELIN1 Output HC151 select signal97 ESSTS Output E-sort control98 ESCMD Input E-sort control99 GND DGND100 GND DGND101 ESSRDY Input E-sort control102 ESCRDY Output E-sort control103 AVcc CPU3.3V104 Vref CPU3.3V105 RTH Analog

inputFusing thermistor

PIN No.


Operating


(3) Image process ASIC (HG73C114HF)a. General

The ASIC is composed of the three blocks: the image process block,the print control block, and the I/F block.

Image process section

According to the operation mode set by the register set value, theimage data from the CCD PWB are placed under shading, AE pro-cess, input gamma process, area separation, filter process, resolu-tion conversion, zoom process, output gamma process, and binarycoding.

Print control section

During copying, image-processed data are outputted to the LSU atthe timing of LSU writing.

I/F section

This section performs DRUM control as image data buffer, imagedata send/receive with the OA982, and data send/receive with theIEEE1284 I/F.

106 ESPAGE Input E-sort control107 SIN1 Input HC151 select detection108 SIN2 Input HC151 select detection109 SIN3 Input HC151 select detection110 Pull up111 KEY IN Input NC112 MSUST1 Input NC113 Avss DGND114 GND DGND115 /SCANSP Output Scan STOP signal116 /SCANST Output Scan START signal117 /TRANSST Output ASIC transfer signal118 PMCLK Output Polygon clock119 SPMT3 Output SPF motor signal120 SPMT2 Output SPF motor signal121 SPMT1 Output SPF motor signal122 SPMT0 Output SPF motor signal123 GND DGND124 GND DGND125 Vcc CPU3.3V126 PSL Output Power save LED control127 /CS3 Output Chip select signal128 /CS2 Output ASIC chip select

PIN No.


Operating

nCS2

nRD PORT1OUT[15..0]

nLWR PORT2OUT[10..0]

A[9..1]

D[15..0] OPE-LATCH

LED Driver OPE-DATA to OPU-PWBnRESET Control OPE-CLK

JTAG TONER MOTOR TMCLK,TMEN to TONER MOTOR DRIVERControl TM,TM-

to SDRAM64Mb or 128Mb CCD-RS,CCD-CK1,CCD-CK2 to CCD(SCAN UNIT)(Op.400MByte) CCD-CP,CCD-SHR

bsmp,vsmp,mclk,OEB

afesen,afesck,afesdito AFE(SCAN UNIT)

to USB I/F

AFE-DB[7..0]

to IEEE1284 I/F

MIRCNT,MTR-Y1,MTR-PH-1,MTR-I01,MTR-I11,MTR-I21

MTR-Y2,MTR-PH-2,MTR-I02,MTR-I12,MTR-I22

to MIRROR MOTOR DRIVERSYNC

to LSU-PWB LD to CCFL(Scan UNIT)LEND CL

CPUSYNC

I/O PORT

CPU BUSI/F


b. ASIC (Signal table)

PIN No.

Signal Name IN/OUT Connected to Description

1 cpudata7 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus2 cpudata6 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus3 cpudata5 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus4 cpudata4 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus5 VCC_AC Power6 cpudata3 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus7 cpudata2 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus8 cpudata1 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus9 cpudata0 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus10 GND_AC Power11 mircnt OUT Buffer IC SPF scanner select

signal 12 cpusync OUT CPU CPU SYNC signal13 mem_intr Not used14 arb_intr OUT CPU INTR signal15 VCC_core Power16 cpu_ad8 IN CPU CPU address bus17 cpu_ad7 IN CPU CPU address bus18 cpu_ad6 IN CPU CPU address bus19 cpu_ad5 IN CPU CPU address bus20 GND_core Power21 ram_clk_in IN ASIC SDRAM clock on the

board22 cpu_ad4 IN CPU CPU address bus23 cpu_ad3 IN CPU CPU address bus24 cpu_ad2 IN CPU CPU address bus25 cpu_ad1 IN CPU CPU address bus26 cpu_ad0 IN CPU CPU address bus27 xcpucs IN CPU CS signal28 sfclk IN Oscillator Clock29 GND_core Power30 xcpuwr IN CPU CPU write signal31 xcpurd IN CPU CPU read signal32 nrst IN SYSTEM

RESETSYSTEM RESET

33 VCC_core Power34 pfclk2 IN Not used35 clock_sw IN Pull up36 GND_core Power37 pfclk1_xout OUT X-tal units VIDEO clock38 pfclk1 IN X-tal units VIDEO clock39 VSSPLL2 Pull up40 VDDPLL2 Pull up41 VSS2 Pull up42 VDDI2 Pull up43 tm2_15m Pull up44 xsync IN LSU Horizontal sync

signal from LSU (/SYNC)

45 GND_AC Power46 xld OUT LSU Laser drive signal 47 xlend OUT LSU Laser APC signal 48 VCC_AC Power49 mmd OUT Tr array IC Main motor control

signal. "H": Main motor ON

50 pmd OUT I/O Polygon motor drive51 tc OUT Tr array IC Transfer charger

control signal. "H":ON52 gridl OUT Tr array IC Main charger grid

control signal. "H": L output

53 mc OUT Tr array IC Main charger control signal. "H": ON

54 bias OUT I/O HV bias drive55 NC OUT I/O Not used56 vfmcnt OUT Tr array IC Ventilation fan

rotation speed control signal. "H": High speed, "L": Low speed

57 VCC_core Power58 vfm OUT Tr array IC Ventilation fan control

signal. "H": Fan ON59 /FPOFF OUT I/O FAX poff signal60 GND_core Power61 DEV DIR OUT I/O CRUM bus control62 spfclh OUT Tr array IC SPF/RSPF resist

roller clutch control signal "H":ON

63 spfrsol OUT Tr array IC SPF/RSPF document feed solenoid control signal "H":ON

64 spfgsol OUT Tr array IC SPF/RSPF gate solenoid control signal "H":ON

65 spfpsol OUT Tr array IC SPF/RSPF document transport solenoid control signal "H":ON

66 VCC_core Power67 bias OUT Tr array IC DV bias control

signal. "H":ON68 lden OUT Tr array IC Laser circuit control

signal. "H": Laser circuit ON

69 GND_AC Power70 MRPS1 OUT I/O SPF current control71 MRPS2 OUT I/O SPF current control72 MRPS3 OUT I/O SPF current control73 CPFS1 OUT I/O 1st cassette pick up

solenoid74 VCC_AC Power75 CPFS2 OUT I/O 2nd cassette pick up

solenoid76 pr OUT I/O Power relay control77 hl OUT Tr array IC Heater lamp control

signal. "H":ON78 GND_core Power79 MPFS OUT I/O Multi-bypass solenoid80 miron OUT Buffer IC SPF scanner select

signal 81 spfon OUT Buffer IC SPF ON signal82 KEYSC1 OUT I/O Key sense control83 KEYSC2 OUT I/O Key sense control84 KEYSC3 OUT I/O Key sense control85 IMC ready OUT I/O IMC control86 VCC_core Power87 tmx OUT Buffer IC Toner motor control

signal 88 tm OUT Buffer IC Toner motor control

signal 89 op_data OUT Tr array IC Operation circuit data

signal90 ope_latch OUT Tr array IC Operation circuit latch

signal. Data take-in at "L"

91 GND_AC Power

PIN No.



92 op_clk OUT Tr array IC Operation circuit clock signal

93 VCC_AC Power94 scanstop IN CPU Scan stop signal95 testpin0 IN TEST TEST96 testmode_on IN TEST TEST97 ie1284_stb IN I/F board

connector/STB signal (IEEE1284 communication port)

98 ie1284_autofd IN I/F board connector

/AUTOFD signal (IEEE1284 communication port)

99 VCC_core Power100 ie1284_slctin IN I/F board

connector/SLCTIN signal (IEEE1284 communication port)

101 ie1284_init IN I/F board connector

/INIT signal (IEEE1284 communication port)

102 ie1284_slct OUT I/F board connector

SLCT signal (IEEE1284 communication port)

103 GND_core Power104 ie1284_pe OUT I/F board

connectorPE signal (IEEE1284 communication port)

105 ie1284_busy OUT I/F board connector

BUSY signal (IEEE1284 communication port)

106 ie1284_ack OUT I/F board connector

/ACK signal (IEEE1284 communication port)

107 ie1284_fault OUT I/F board connector

/FAULT signal (IEEE1284 communication port)

108 VCC_core Power109 ie1284_rev OUT I/F board

connector/REV signal (IEEE1284 communication port)

110 ie1284_parad7 IN/OUT I/F board connector

DATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port)











116 VCC_AC Power117 ie1284_parad1 IN/OUT I/F board

connectorDATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port)



119 suspend OUT I/F board connector

SUSPEND signal (USB communication port)

120 GND_AC Power121 oen OUT I/F board

connectorOEN signal (USB communication port)

122 vmout OUT I/F board connector

VMOUT signal (USB communication port)

123 vpout OUT I/F board connector

VPOUT signal (USB communication port)

124 GND_core Power

PIN No.


125 vmin IN I/F board connector

VMIN signal (USB communication port)

126 vpin IN I/F board connector

VPIN signal (USB communication port)

127 rcv IN I/F board connector

RCV signal (USB communication port)

128 scanst IN CPU Scan start signal129 printst IN Start signal Start signal130 receptst IN Start signal Start signal131 transst IN CPU Data transfer start

signal132 VCC_core Power133 dci_dat7 IN E-SORT

(OA982)E-SORT data bus

134 dci_dat6 IN E-SORT (OA982)

E-SORT data bus


E-SORT data bus


E-SORT data bus


E-SORT data bus


E-SORT data bus


E-SORT data bus


E-SORT data bus

141 GND_core Power142 out_dc_req IN E-SORT

(OA982)E-SORT control signal

143 in_dc_req IN E-SORT (OA982)

E-SORTcontrol signal

144 GND_AC Power145 out_dc_ack OUT E-SORT

(OA982)E-SORT control signal

146 out_dc_wt OUT E-SORT (OA982)

E-SORT control signal

147 VCC_AC Power148 in_dc_ack OUT E-SORT

(OA982)E-SORTcontrol signal

149 in_dc_cs OUT E-SORT (OA982)

E-SORTcontrol signal

150 dco_dat7 OUT E-SORT (OA982)

E-SORT data bus


E-SORT data bus


E-SORT data bus


E-SORT data bus


E-SORT data bus

155 VCC_AC Power156 dco_dat2 OUT E-SORT

(OA982)E-SORT data bus


E-SORT data bus


E-SORT data bus

159 hsync FAX FAX160 GND_core Power161 out_req Not used162 in_ack Not used163 in_cs Not used164 GND_AC Power

PIN No.



165 mdat00 Not used166 mdat01 Not used167 mdat02 Not used168 mdat03 Not used169 VCC_core Power170 mdat04 Not used171 mdat05 Not used172 mdat06 Not used173 GND_core Power174 mdat07 Not used175 mdat08 Not used176 mdat09 Not used177 VCC_AC Power178 mdat10 Not used179 mdat11 Not used180 mdat12 Not used181 VCC_core Power182 mdat13 Not used183 mdat14 Not used184 mdat15 Not used185 GND_AC Power186 pcl_s_print Not used187 fax_s_print Not used188 es_s_print Not used189 out_ack Not used190 out_cs Not used191 in_req Not used192 VCC_core Power193 TCK JTAG Not used194 TMS JTAG Not used195 TRSTA JTAG Not used196 TDI JTAG Not used197 TDO JTAG Not used198 GND_core Power199 afp_vsmp OUT CCD PWB AFE control signal200 ccd_tg OUT CCD PWB CCD control signal201 ccdrs OUT CCD PWB CCD control signal202 afp_bsmp OUT CCD PWB AFE control signal203 ccdcp OUT CCD PWB CCD control signal204 afe_sdata IN CCD PWB AD's serial data205 ccd_ph2 OUT CCD PWB CCD control signal206 ccd_ph1 OUT CCD PWB CCD control signal207 afp_afesen OUT CCD PWB AFE control signal208 GND_core Power209 afp_adcclk OUT CCD PWB AFE control signal210 VCC_core Power211 afp_afesck OUT CCD PWB AFE control signal212 GND_AC Power213 afp_data7 IN CCD PWB Image scan data214 afp_data6 IN CCD PWB Image scan data215 afp_data5 IN CCD PWB Image scan data216 afp_data4 IN CCD PWB Image scan data217 afp_data3 IN CCD PWB Image scan data218 afp_data2 IN CCD PWB Image scan data219 afp_data1 IN CCD PWB Image scan data220 afp_data0 IN CCD PWB Image scan data221 VCC_AC Power222 cl OUT Logic IC Copy lamp control

signal223 GND_core Power224 mtr_y3 OUT I/O Carriage motor

current control signal 225 mtr_y2 OUT Tr array IC Carriage motor

current control signal

PIN No.


226 mtr_y1 OUT Tr array IC Carriage motor current control signal

227 VCC_core Power228 mtr_phase2 OUT Motor driver Carriage motor

control signal 229 mtr_i02 OUT Motor driver Carriage motor



control signal 232 mtr_phase1 OUT Motor driver Carriage motor




control signal 236 GND_AC Power237 ram_mad3 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image

process page memory) address bus

238 ram_mad2 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) address bus

239 GND_core Power240 ram_mad1 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image




243 VCC_core Power244 ram_banks1 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image

process page memory) BANK signal

245 ram_banks0 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) BANK signal

246 xram_cs OUT SDRAM (Image process page memory) CS signal

247 xram_ras OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) RAS signal

248 xram_cas OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) CAS signal

249 VCC_AC Power250 xram_wde OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image

process page memory) WDE signal

251 ram_dqm0 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) DQM signal

252 GND_AC Power253 ram_data7 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image

process page memory) data bus

PIN No.



(4) Reset circuitThis circuit detects ON/OFF of the power source, and controls start/stop of each circuit. The voltage of 3.3V in the MCU PWB is detectedby the reset IC to generate the reset signal.

When the power voltage reaches the specified level, each circuit isoperated, but stopped before the power voltage falls below the speci-fied level in order to protect against malfunction of the circuit. TheCPU/Flash ROM is reset by the power reset circuit, and system resetof ASIC, OA982, FAX, and NIC is generated from the CPU (general-purpose port output).

254 ram_data6 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus



257 GND_core Power258 ram_data3 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image





262 GND_AC Power263 ram_data15 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image



265 VCC_AC Power266 ram_data13 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image







272 VCC_core Power273 ram_dqm1 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image

process page memory) DQM signal

274 ram_cke OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) CKE signal

275 GND_AC Power276 ram_clk_out SDRAM SDRAM's clock277 GND_core Power278 ram_mad12 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image




PIN No.


281 VCC_core Power282 ram_mad8 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image



284 VCC_AC Power285 ram_mad6 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image




288 GND_AC Power289 cpudata15 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus290 cpudata14 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus291 cpudata13 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus292 cpudata12 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus293 cpudata11 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus294 cpudata10 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus295 cpudata9 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus296 cpudata8 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus

PIN No.


R1811kF

21

C220.1u

12

C23OPEN

12

R20

10kF

21

IC4

M51957BFP

NC 8

GND4

VCC 7NC1

IN2

NC3

Cd 5OUT 6

R193.3kJ

21

VCC3 VCC3

/RESET0 (2-C4)

Reset IC


(5) Heater lamp control circuita. Outline

The heater lamp control circuit detects the heat roller surface tempera-ture, and converts the temperature into a voltage. The converted volt-age is inputted to the CPU.

The CPU converts the inputted analog voltage into a digital value. Thedigital conversion value and the set value of the test command arecompared to control ON/OFF of the heater lamp according to the level,controlling the heat roller surface temperature to be the fixed level.

[High temperature protection circuit in case of CPU hung up(uncontrollable)]

For IC22 3Pin (reference voltage), +3.3V is divided by the resistor. Thethermistor terminal voltage is inputted to IC22 2Pin. When, therefore,the voltage at 2Pin falls below the voltage at 3Pin, IC22 1Pin becomes"H" and the HL signal is pulled to the GND level, suppressing genera-tion of the lighting signal of the heater lamp. (IC22 output 1Pin is nor-mally Low.)

[When the heat roller surface temperature is lower than the setlevel]

a. When the thermistor terminal voltage is higher than the set level,the output signal HL from ASIC becomes HIGH level.

b. This HL signal becomes the HLOUT signal through IC26, and isinputted to the photo triac coupler in the power PWB. When, there-fore, the HL signal is HIGH, the internal triac turns on.

c. When the internal triac turns on, the heater lamp lights up.

[When the heat roller surface temperature is higher than the setlevel]

a. When the thermistor terminal voltage falls below the set level, theoutput signal HL from ASIC becomes LOW level.

b. The HL signal becomes LOW, the power PWB photo triac couplerturns OFF, and the heater lamp turns OFF.

[When the thermistor is open]

The voltage at IC22 6Pin becomes higher than the voltage at 5Pin, andthe 7Pin output THOPEN becomes LOW. This is inputted to the CPUto display the trouble code H2.

(6) Driver circuit (Clutch, solenoid)Since a load cannot be directly driven by each load signal from theCPU or the ASIC, each load is driven through the driver IC (transistorarray).

A large drive current (load current) is ordained from a small input cur-rent (ASIC output current).

When the driver input voltage (base resistor input) is HIGH, the transis-tor turns ON to flow a current through the load, operating the load.

R687.5kF

21

R714.3kF

21

D1

MA700

1 2

R671MF

21

R661kF

21

R7010kF

21

R691kJ

21

C11122000p

12 C113

0.1u

12

R81300J 21

R82100J 21

C112

0.1u

12

R831.2kF

21

R8510kF

21

R8410kJ

21

C114

22000p

12

D4

1SS355

12

R86240J

21

R87240J

21

IC22AKIA393F

3

21

84

+

-

C110

0.1u

12

IC22BKIA393F

5

67

84

+

-

IC24AKIA358F

3

21

84

+

-

IC26

KID65503F

1B1

2B2

3B3

4B4

5B5

6B6

7B7

G8 NC 9

1C 16

2C 15

3C14

4C 13

5C 12

6C11

7C10

Q2KRA119S 1

2

3

D2

KDS226

2

13

D3

KDS226

2

13

INT5V

12VVCC3

VCC3 VCC3

12VVCC3

12V

12V

12V

VCC3

5V

MRPS1

HLLDEN

PMCLK

FTH

HLOUT

PMCLK_AMRPS_1

/LDEN

MRPS_2

FTH

RTH

THOPEN

RTH_IN

MRPS2MRPS3 MRPS_3

(11-B2)

(11-B2)

(6-A1)(6-A1)(6-A1)

(5-E3)(2-D1)(2-C1)(2-D1)(2-D1)(2-C1)(1-A2)

(10-B3)

(1-A3)

(4-A4)

(5-B2)

(11-C1)

LOAD

+24V

ASIC/CPUOUT PUT

LOAD


(7) Toner motor control circuitThe IC32 is the motor drive IC, which generates pseudo-AC wave-forms by the pulse signal from the ASIC to drive the toner supplymotor.

(8) Main motor control circuit/ LSU (Polygon motor) control circuit

The motors are driven by the MMD (main motor) signal and the PMD(polygon motor) signal from the ASIC.

The MMD signal and the PMD signal are turned HIGH and sent

through the driver IC27 to the control circuit in the main motor/LSU,rotating each motor.

When the motor RPM reaches the specified level, the MMLD signal(main) and the PMLD signal (LSU) become LOW. The CPU detects itto start process control.

(9) Mirror motor control circuit, SPF motor control circuit, Duplex motor control circuit, Shifter motor control circuit.

Stepping motors are employed for the mirror motor, the SPF motor,and the duplex motor. The driver for IC29 (for the mirror motor) is thebipolar drive constant current drive IC. The drive for IC31 (for the SPF)is the uni-polar drive constant current drive IC. The drive for IC28 (forthe duplex) and IC30 (for the shifter) is the constant current drive IC.

Each motor is driven in W1-2 phase excitement, 1-2 phase excitement,or 2-phase excitement.

The mirror motor/SPF motor related to image scan are driven by a con-stant current, and each motor current is switched in each magnificationratio.

R11347kJ

21

R11247kJ

21

C12810u/35V

12

+

R1051kJ

21

R1061kJ

21

IC32

BA6920FP

Vcc 17

GND 8

Rin20

Fin18 OUT1 9

OUT2 5

VM16

VREF21

RNF6

PSAVE19

NC1

NC2

NC3

NC4

NC7

NC10

NC11

NC12

NC13 NC 14NC 15NC22NC 23NC 24NC 25

FIN FIN

C129

0.1u/50V

12

24V

PGND

PGND

PGND

(TM)(TM_)

TMB_OTMA_O

(4-D3)(4-D3)

(11-A1)(11-A1)

Tonner Motor Driver

IC27

KID65503F

1B1

2B2

3B3

4B4

5B5

6B6

7B7

G8

NC9

1C 16

2C 15

3C 14

4C13

5C 12

6C 11

7C 10

Q3KRC106S

1

2

3

R8810kJ

21

5V

PMD

MM_Y2

MMDMM_Y1

MM_Y3

/PMD

MMref1

/MMD

MMref2

MMref0

POFF /POFF

/LEND

SHOLD(10-B4)(11-B2)

(11-B2)

(11-A4)

(6-A3)(6-A3)(6-A3)

(2-C1)

(2-C1)

(2-C1)

(2-A3)

(2-C1)

(2-A3)

(1-D3)


C116820p

1 2

C117820p

12

C118820p

12

C1210.1u

12

C115820p

1 2

C1190.1u

12

R921.5kJ

21

R90

0.68J1W

21

R9430kJ

21

R9530kJ

21

R911.5kJ

21

R89

0.68J1W

21

R98510J

21

R971kJ

21

R962kJ

21

R931kJ

21

IC29

L6219DS or AMM56219

OUT 2A2

SENSE 23

COMP 24

OUT 2B5

GND6

GND7

I028

I129

PHASE 210

VREF 211

RC 212 VSS 13RC 1 14VREF 1 15PHASE 116I11 17GND 18GND 19I0120OUT 1B 21COMP 1 22SENSE 123VS24

OUT 1A1

5V

24VM 5V

5V

PGNDPGND

PGND

PGND

PGND PGND

PGND

PGND

MM_PH_A

OUT_A-

MM_AI0

MM_PH_B

MM_BI0MM_BI1

MM_AI1

OUT_A+

OUT_B-

MMref0MMref1MMref2

OUT_B+

(10-D2)

(2-A3)(2-A3)(2-A3)

(2-A3)

(2-A3)(2-A3)

(5-C1)(5-C1)(5-C1)

Scanner Motor Driver

(10-D2)(10-D2)(10-D2)

R107300J

21

C125 2200p

1 2

R99 7.5kJ21

C126 2200p1 2

R100 7.5kJ

21

C132

2200p

12

C136

OPEN

12

C130

OPEN

12

C127 OPEN

1 2

C137 OPEN1 2

C135

2200p

12

R104 2.4kJ

21

R111 2.4kJ21

R1011kJ

21

R1151kJ

21

C134

0.1u

12

R108620J

21

R1091.2kJ

21

R110100J

21

R102750J

21

R103 1J 2W

21 IC31

MTD1361/F

CrA23

CrB20

VsA25

RsA3

VrefA24

VrefB19

RsB12

VsB18

In /A26

In A27

In /B17

In B16

Vmm 22

OUT /A1

OUT A 4

OUT /B 14

OUT B11

PG 15

PG 28R114 1J 2W21

PGND

PGND

PGND

PGND

PGND

24VM

5V

SPMT_2

(SPFMT2)

SPMT_0SPMT_3SPMT_1

MRPS_1MRPS_2MRPS_3

(SPFMT0)(SPFMT3)(SPFMT1)

(5-C2)(5-C2)(5-C2)

(4-D3)(4-D3)(4-D3)(4-D3)

(11-D1)(11-D1)

(11-E1)

(11-E1)

SPF Motor Driver

D5

MTZ J22B

IC28

TD62064AF

I13

NC4

NC5

I26

NC10

I311

NC12

NC13

GND17

O12

O27

O39

O416

COM1

COM8

GND18

I414

NC15

PGND

24VDup

DMT0 /DMT0

DMT1

DMT2

DMT3

/DMT1

/DMT2

/DMT3

(11-B3)

(11-B3)

(11-B3)

(11-B3)

(1-D3)

(1-D3)

(1-D3)

(1-D3)

Duplex Motor Driver

D6

MTZ J22B

IC30

TD62064AF

I13

NC4

NC5

I26

NC10

I311

NC12

NC13

GND17

O12

O2 7

O39

O4 16

COM1

COM8

GND18

I414

NC15

R3380J

21

R3390J

21

R3400J

21

R3410J

21

PGND

24VSFT

SFTMT0 /SFTMT0

SFTMT1

SFTMT2

/SFTMT1

/SFTMT2

/SFTMT3

SFTMT3

Shifter Motor Driver

(4-B2)

(4-B2)

(4-B2)

(4-B2)

(11-A1)

(11-A1)

(11-A1)

(11-A1)


(10) OPE PWBa. Outline

The operation circuit is composed of the LCD control circuit, the keymatrix circuit, the display matrix circuit, and the buzzer circuit, realizingthe U/I functions.

b. LCD control circuit

The character LCD (COG) in 2 lines and 16 digits is used. The displaydata are sent from the MCU (CPU) to LCD internal registers, control-ling the LCD.

c. Key matrix circuit

The SEL signal is sent from the CPU of MCU to the matrix selector IC(multiplexer) in the operation circuit. The signal detects OFF/ON of thekey, and is sent to the CPU as serial data.

d. LED matrix circuit

The display is controlled by inputting the serial data signal, the clocksignal, and the latch signal from ASIC to the LED driver in the opera-tion circuit.

In the LED driver, data are set to the register (8bit) and latched to con-trol the IC output port, performing matrix-driving of ON/OFF of the LED.

(11) Carriage Unita. Outline

The carriage unit is provided with the CCD PWB, the inverter PWB, thelamps, etc. A document is radiated, and image data read by the CCDare A/D converted to be sent to the ASIC.

b. CCD PWB

The color image sensor uPD8861 (5400 pixels x 3 lines) is used as theCCD on the CCD PWB to scan images in the resolution of 600dpi/USletter size in the main scanning direction.

Image data scanned by the CCD are inputted to AFE (AD9826), wherethey are A/D-converted to output digital data. The output digital dataare sent to the MCU PWB and to the ASIC. The ASIC performs imageprocess with the digital data.

c. Lamp inverter PWB

The transformer is controlled by the lamp control signal from the MCUPWB to turn ON/OFF the cool cathode ray tube by the transformer out-put.

B. DC power circuitThe DC power circuit directly rectifies the AC power and performsswitching-conversion with the DC/DC converter circuit, and rectifiesand smoothes again to generate a DC voltage.

The constant voltage control circuit is of +5VEN. +24V and +12V are ofthe non-control system by winding from the +5VEN winding. As shownin fig (1), +24V, +12V, and +5V are provided with the ON/OFF functionby external signals. +3.3V is outputted from +5VEN to the regulator IC.

Refer to the block diagram, fig (1).

fig (1) Block diagram

(1) Noise filter circuitThe filter circuit is composed of L and C. It reduces common noisesand normal mode noises generated from the AC line.

The common noise means that generated in each line for GND. Itsnoise component is delivered through C002, C003, and C022 to GND.

The normal noise means that overlapped in the AC line or the outputline. It is attenuated by C023, C001, L002, C004, and L003. Refer to fig(2).

fig (2) Noise filter circuit

(2) Rush current prevention circuit and rectifying/smoothing circuit

fig (3) Rush current prevention, rectifying/smoothing circuit

Noise filtercircuit

Rush currentprevention circuit

Rectifying/smoothing

circuit

Inverter circuit(Ringing choke converter system)

Rectifying/smoothing circuit (Semiconductor switch)

Rectifying/smoothing circuit

+12V regulator IC(with ON/OFF function)

Overcurrentprotection circuit

Controlcircuit

Constant-voltagedetection circuit

(Semiconductor switch)

+3.3Vregulator IC


Since the AC power is directly rectified, if there were not this rush cur-rent prevention resistor (TH001), an extremely large rush currentwould flow due to a charging current flowing through the smoothingcapacitor C006 when turning on the power.

To prevent against this, the rush current prevention resistor TH001 isprovided between the rectifying diode D003 and the smoothing diodeC006, suppressing a rush current.

The rectifying/smoothing circuit rectifies a 60Hz AC voltage with therectifying circuit, and smoothes it with the smoothing capacitor C006.

(3) Inverter and control circuit (Ringing choke converter system)

Fig. (4) Inverter and control circuit

When the power is supplied to this circuit, the DC voltage, Vref, sup-plied by the rectifying/smoothing circuit is applied through R006 andR007 to FET (Q001), turning on Q001.

When Q001 is turned on, the drain current, ID, flows as the waveform Bin Fig. (5) to apply VDC to the main winding, NP, on the primary side.

At the same time, a voltage is generated in NC winding and appliedthrough R005 and C008b to the gate of Q001. As a result, Q001 isturned on rapidly.

At the same time with this, C009 is charged through D001, R001, andD012. When the potential of C009 reaches 0.7V (= VBE of Q002), Q002turns on to turn off Q001.

Fig. (5) Ringing choke converter operation waveforms

When Q001 turns off, energy accumulated in the transformer (T001)flows a current of waveform C in the path indicated with dotted line asshown in the figure above through D101 and D113 and dissipates tothe secondary output side. When this energy is exhausted, the currentflowing through D101 and D113 turns off. However, the NS winding hasa slight remaining energy, which generates a voltage in the base wind-ing NC and turns on Q001 again to repeat switching operation, supply-ing a high frequency power to the secondary side.

(4) Overcurrent protection circuit (Primary side)The ON period extension due to an increased output load is detected,and the OFF period of Q001 is extended by the control circuit, andenergy accumulated in the primary winding of the transformer T001 isreduced, providing protection against an overcurrent. Refer to Fig. (4).

(5) Rectifying/smoothing circuit (+5V)

fig (6) Rectifying/smoothing circuit

The high frequency pulse generated by the inverter circuit isdecreased by the converter transformer, rectified by the high frequencydiode D113, and smoothed by C107 and C108.

fig (7) +5V rectifying/smoothing circuit voltage waveform

IDNp

Ns

Nc

Q001VDS waveform

Q001ID waveform

Secondary output sideD706 D113ID waveform

Voltage waveform

Voltage waveform


[14] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM1. MCU PWB

MCU PWB (CPU section)

C240.1u

C4

12p

R11

10kJ

R50J

BR

2033

J1 2 3 4

8 7 6 5

R1811kF

C2547p

R2010kF

BR

2133

J1 2 3 4

8 7 6 5

R193.3kJ

IC2

HD6412321VF25(H8S/2321)

P35/P34/P33/P32/P31P30/

PD7PD6PD5PD4

PDPD2PDPDPEPEPEPE

PEPEPPE

AVcc103

Vref104

P40/AN0105

P41/AN1106

P42/AN2107

P43/AN3108

P44/AN4109

P45/AN5110

P46/AN6/DA0111

P47/AN7/DA1112

AVss113

Vss114

P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD115

P16/PO14/TIOCA2116

P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC117

P14/PO12/TIOCA1118

P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB119

P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA120

P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DACK1121

P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DACK0122

MD0123

MD1124

MD2125

PG0/CAS126

PG1/CS3127

PG2/CS2128

PG

3/C

S1

1

PG

4/C

S0

2

Vss

3

NC

4

VC

C5

PC

0/A

06

PC

1/A

17

PC

2/A

28

PC

3/A

39

Vss

10

PC

4/A

411

PC

5/A

512

PC

6/A

613

PC

7/A

714

PB

0/A

815

PB

1/A

916

PB

2/A

1017

PB

3/A

1118

Vss

19

PB

4/A

1220

PB

5/A

1321

PB

6/A

1422

PB

7/A

1523

PA

0/A

1624

PA

1/A

1725

PA

2/A

1826

PA

3/A

1927

Vss

28

PA

4/A

20/IR

Q4

29

PA

5/A

21/IR

Q5

30

PA

6/A

22/IR

Q6

31

PA

7/A

23/IR

Q7

32

P67

//

CS

7IR

Q3

33

P66

//

CS

6IR

Q2

34

Vss

35

Vss

36

P65

/IRQ

137

P64

/IRQ

038

P53

/AD

TR

G10

2

P52

/SC

K2

101

Vss

100

Vss

99

P51

/RxD

298

P50

/TxD

297

PF

0/B

RE

Q96

PF

1/B

AC

K95

PF

2//W

AIT

/BR

EQ

OLC

AS

94

PF

3/LW

R93

PF

4/H

WR

92

PF

5/R

D91

PF

6/A

S90

VC

C89

PF

7/0

88

Vss

87

EX

TAL

86

XTA

L85

VC

C84

ST

BY

83

NM

I82

RE

S81

WD

TO

VF

80

P20

/PO

0/T

IOC

A3

79

P21

/PO

1/Y

ICO

B3

78

P22

/PO

2/T

IOC

C3

77

P23

/PO

3/T

IOC

D3

76

P24

/PO

4/T

IOC

A4

75

P25

/PO

5/T

IOC

B4

74

P26

/PO

6/T

IOC

A5

73

P27

/PO

7/T

IOC

B5

72

P63

/TE

ND

171

P62

/DR

EQ

170

P61

//

TE

ND

0C

S5

69

Vss

68

Vss

67

P60

//

DR

EQ

0C

S4

66

Vss

65

R4 *3

BR

2233

J1 2 3 4

8 7 6 5

C1*6

R13

10kJ

R2 *2

BR

2333

J1 2 3 4

8 7 6 5

IC4

M51957BFP

NC 8

GND4

VCC 7NC1

IN2

NC3

Cd 5OUT 6

BR

2433

J1 2 3 4

8 7 6 5

R7 *4

C38

122

pF

R1OPEN

C38

2O

PE

NC

383

OP

EN

C38

4O

PE

N

X1HC-49U/S19.6608MHz

R2210kJ

R21 33J

C220.1u

R8 33J

BR110

33J

1234

8765

IC1

P2010/PLL701-01

Xin 1

Xout 2

FS0 3

Vss 4SSon5 MODOUT6 SR07 VDD8

R12

10kJ

C3 *5

R3 *1

R60J

R10 100J

R33733J

C23OPEN

C20.1u

R9 33J

C386OPEN

A0 A5

A2

A4

A11

A19

A13A3

A8

A10A7

A12

A16

A14

A18A1

A15

A17A6

A9

CP

UC

LK(N

C)

/TRANSST

SPFMT0

/SCANSP

SPFMT1SPFMT2

/SCANST

SPFMT3

/ST

BY

ES_CMD

RD

/ESS_RDY/ESC_RDY

HWR

/PRINTST

LWR

ESS_TS

RESETOUT1

NM

I

/WD

TO

VF

/CS0#/CS1#/CS2#/CS3#

VCC3

VCC3

VCC3

VCC3

VCC3

VCC3

/PRINTST

/RESET0

/ASIC_RST

/ES_PAGE

MSU_ST1

SPFMT0

SPFMT2/MIRCNT

(SIN2)

SPFMT1

/TRANSST

(KEYIN)

PMCLK

RTH

SPFMT3

/SCANSP

PSL

/SCANST

(SIN3)

(SIN1)

ESS_TS

/ESC_RDY

ES_CMD

/HWR/LWR

/ESS_RDY

/RD

SELIN3SELIN2SELIN1

/RE

SE

T1

/CS3/CS2/CS1/CS0

Spreading Range :+/- 1.25%

R4(*3)

When IC1 is, mounted NOT mounted

OPEN 0J

R3(*1) OPEN 680J

R7(*4) 22J OPEN

R2(*2) 0J OPEN

C3(*5)

C1(*6)

22pF

22pF

15pF

15pF

*R2,R3,C1, and C3 are tentative

(2-D2)(2-E3)

(2-E3)

(2-E3)

(4-C3)(4-C2)

(4-C3)(4-C3)

(2-D1)

(5-B2)

(2-C4)

(8-A2)

(13-B2)

(4-D4)(4-D4)

(4-C3)

(4-D4)

(5-E3)

(4-D4)

(8-A1)

Reset IC

(4-C2)

(8-A3)

(13-B2) (2-C1)

(4-C2)

(3-A2)(4-A2)(2-C1)

(4-C2)

(3-A2)

(8-A3)(8-A2)(8-A2)

(9-B2)

A

A

B

B

C

C

4

3

2

1

AR-M150/M155/M155X CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 1

C9

0.1u

C14

0.1u

BR8

10kJ

1234

8765

BR10

10kJ

1234

8765

BR5

10kJ

1234

8765

H8S/2321

P35/SCK1 64

P34/SCK0 63

P33/RxD1 62

P32/RxD0 61

P31/TxD1 60

P30/TxD0 59

VCC 58

PD7/D15 57

PD6/D14 56

PD5/D13 55

PD4/D12 54

Vss 53

PD3/D11 52

PD2/D10 51

PD1/D9 50

PD0/D8 49

PE7/D7 48

PE6/D6 47

PE5/D5 46

PE4/D4 45

Vss 44

PE3/D3 43

PE2/D2 42

PE1/D1 41

PE0/D0 40

VCC 39

65/

QP

64/IR

Q0

38Q

Vss

65

BR7

10kJ

1234

8765

BR9

10kJ

1234

8765

C6

100p

BR11

10kJ

1234

8765

R15 1kJ

BR1433J

1234

8765

BR12

10kJ

1234

8765

BR94

10kJ

1234

8765

BR1633J

1234

8765

BR13

10kJ

1234

8765

C70.1u

BR18

10kJ

1234

8765

BR1733J

1234

8765

BR15

10kJ

1234

8765

C10

0.1u

BR1933J

1234

8765

C11

0.1u

IC3

24WC02

E0 1

E1 2

E2 3

VSS 4SDA5 SCL6 WC7 VCC8

C12

0.1u

C38

5O

PE

N

C13

0.1u

C8

10u/16V

+

C5100p

BR1

10kJ

1234

8765

R33133J

BR2

10kJ

1234

8765

L1ZJSR5101-223

BR3

10kJ

1234

8765

R1410kJ

BR4

10kJ

1234

8765

R17OPEN

R16 1kJ

BR6

10kJ

1234

8765

CPUCLK(NC)

SPFMT1

(FW)

mt_at_home

LWR

/CS0#

/CS2#

CPU_SYNC

/CS1#

SCL

TxD1

SPFMT0

/SCANSP

(SPPD)

/TRANSST

CCD_TG

SDA

(PSW)

SPFMT3

ARB_INT

/SCANST

SPFMT2

HWRRD

A20

(SPPD)

MT_HOMECPU_SYNC

(PSW)

CCD_TG

(FW)ARB_INT

POFF

SCL

/CS3#

TXD1

A20

(SIN3)(SIN2)(SIN1)

(KEYIN)

SDA

SCLSDA

DMT3

/WDTOVFD14

/CS4#

POFF

D8

D5

RY/BY

D1D0

DMT0

D1

D15

D7

D11

D3

D0

D12

D11

RESETOUT1

D13

D8

D3

/CS4#

D10

D4

D7

D5

DMT1

RY/BY D9

DMT2

D6

D2

D9

D14

D6

D4

D10

/STBY

/PRINTST

D12

D15

D2

D13

/ESC_RDY/ESS_RDYES_CMDESS_TS

DMT3

DMT0

DMT2DMT1

NMI

CPU3.3

CPU3.3

VCC3

VCC3

VCC3 VCC3 VCC3

A[19..0]

mt_at_home

RY/BY

(PSW)

CCD_TG

CPU_SYNC

ARB_INT

D[15..0]

(SPPD)

(FW)

SDA1

SCL

POFF

DMT2

LCDDB7LCDDB6

DMT1DMT0

TxD1

LCDRSLCDE

LCDDB5LCDDB4

DMT3

/CS4

BZR

(2-A1) (3-A3)

(2-B1)(4-D4)

(14-C3)

(7-E1)

(2-B1)

(2-A4)

(7-E1)

(2-A1)

(6-D4)(6-D4)(6-D4)(6-D4)

(5-B1)

(3-B2)

(14-D3)

(13-C2)(3-A1) (4-A2)

(4-A1)

(4-B1)

(11-B2)

(4-C3)

(4-C1)(4-C1)

Serial EE-PROM

(4-C1)(4-C1)

(4-C1)(4-C1)

(13-B2)

(8-A2)

C

C

D

D

E

E

4

3

2

1

1/14


A

A

B

B

C

C

4

3

2

1

(14-D3)

(1-D2),(14-D3)

(14-A3)

(14-A4)

(14-D3)

(14-A2)

(14-A2)

(14-D3)

(14-D3)

(14-A2)

(14-A2)

(14-A2)

(14-A2)

(5-B1)(5-B1)

(6-B3)(6-B3)(6-B3)

(6-B3)(6-B3)(6-B3)

(5-B1)

(3-E2)

(3-E3)

(3-D2)(3-D2)

(3-D2)

(3-D2)

(3-D2)

(3-D2)(3-D2)

(3-E1)

(3-E2)(3-E2)

(1-D2)

(1-C1)

(5-B

1)

(1-A

2)

(4-C

3)

(1-D

2)

(1-D

2)

(1-B

3)(1

-B3)

(1-B

1)

(5B

1)

(3-A1)(4-A2)(13-C2)

(3-A3)

(3-A

2)(1

3-B2

)(8

-A1)

(4-C

1)

(1-B

1)

(9-B

2)

(3-B

2)

MCU PWB (ASIC section)

RAMDB0RAMDB1RAMDB2RAMDB3




SFCLK48

PFCLKIN

PFCLKOUT

MM_BI2MM_AI0

MM_BI1

MM_AI2

MM_BI0

MM_AI1

/INREQ/OUTACK/FAXPRO/PCLPRO

/OUTCS

A8

D9

/OU

TC

S

/PC

LPR

O

MM_BI2

RAMDB13

D7

RA

M_C

LK_O

UT

AFE_SDI

D4

D2

ME

M_I

NT

MM_AI0

RAMDB14

D8

PF

CLK

IN

/FA

XP

RO

D15

PF

CLK

OU

T

D3

D0

A7

A6

A5

CLK

SW

RAMDB9/IN

RE

Q

MM_BI1MM_BI0

MM_AI2MM_AI1

D1

D13 D

5

JTG

_T

DI

D12

D11

RAMDB12

A4

A2

A1

/OU

TA

CK

A9

A3

RAMDB1

D6

SF

CLK

48

RAMDB15

D10

PF

CLK

SY

NC

#

D14

JTG

_TD

O

RAMDB2

/ES

PR

D


RAMDB3

RAMDB0

RAMDB11RAMDB10

RAMDB8

AFE_DB2

AFE_DB7

AFE_DB0

AFE_DB6

AFE_DB3

AFE_DB4

AFE_DB1

AFE_DB5AFE_DB7AFE_DB6AFE_DB5AFE_DB4

AFE_DB3AFE_DB2AFE_DB1AFE_DB0

AFE_SDI

JTG

_TM

SJT

G_T

CK

JTG_TDIJTG_TMSJTG_TCK

JTG_TDO

MAD11

MAD8

MAD4

MAD1MAD2

MAD5MAD6

MAD9

MAD3

MAD0

MAD7

MAD12

MAD10

RAM_CLK_OUT

AFE_SEN

ADCLK

CCD_CP

CCD_PHI1

CCD_PHI2

CCD_TG

AFE_DB[7..0]

CL

CCD_RS

VSAMP

AFE_SCK

AFE_SDI

BSAMP

MM_Y1

MM_PH_AMM_AI0MM_AI1

MM_PH_BMM_BI0MM_BI1

MM_Y2MM_Y3

BANK1BANK0

/SDCAS/SDRAS

/SDCS

DQM0

MAD[12..0]

/SDWDE

SDCKEDQM1

SDCLK

D[15..0]

A[19..0]

/CS

2

MIR

CN

TC

PU

_SY

NC

/LW

R/R

D

RAMDB[15..0]A

RB

_IN

T

MM

D

(/A

SIC

_RS

T)

/LE

ND

VID

EO

#

/RE

SE

T0

VCC3

VCC3

VCC3

VCC3

C3970.1u

R35133J

C69 12p

IC5

HG73C138HFV

ASIC

1 2 3 4 86 75 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

192

191

190

189

188

187

186

185

184

183

182

181

180

179

178

177

176

175

174

256255254253252251250249248247246245244243242241240239238237236235234233232

217

231230

225

221

226

220

219

223

218

216

215

229228227

224

222

214

213

212

211

210

209

208

207

206

205

204

203

202

201

200

199

198

197

195

196

193

194

33

257258259260261262263264265266267268269270271272273274275276277278279280281282283284285286287288289290291292293294295296

CP

U_D

AT

A7

CP

U_D

AT

A6

CP

U_D

AT

A5

CP

U_D

AT

A4

CP

U_D

AT

A1

CP

U_D

AT

A3

CP

U_D

AT

A2

VC

C(A

C)

CP

U_D

AT

A0

GN

D(A

C)

MIR

CN

T/C

PU

SY

NC

ME

M_I

NT

AR

B_I

NT

VC

C(C

OR

E)

CP

U_A

D8

CP

U_A

D7

CP

U_A

D6

CP

U_A

D5

GN

D(C

OR

E)

RA

M_C

LK_I

NC

PU

_AD

4C

PU

_AD

3C

PU

_AD

2C

PU

_AD

1C

PU

_AD

0/C

PU

CS

SF

CLK

48G

ND

(CO

RE

)/C

PU

WR

/CP

UR

D/R

ES

ET

PF

CLK

CLK

SW

GN

D(C

OR

E)

PF

CLK

OU

TP

FC

LKIN

GN

D(P

LL)

VC

C(P

LL)

GN

D(P

LL)

VC

C(P

LL)

TM

2_15

M/S

YN

CG

ND

(AC

)/V

IDE

O/L

EN

DV

CC

(AC

)O

UT

P00

VC

C(C

OR

E)

/INR

EQ

/OU

TC

S/O

UT

AC

K/E

SP

RD

/FA

XP

RD

/PC

LPR

DG

ND

(AC

)M

DA

T15

MD

AT

14M

DA

T13

VC

C(C

OR

E)

MD

AT

12M

DA

T11

MD

AT

10V

CC

(AC

)M

DA

T09

MD

AT

08M

DT

0

RAM_DATA4RAM_DATA5RAM_DATA6RAM_DATA7GND(AC)RAM_DQM0RAM_WDEVCC(AC)RAM_CASRAM_RASRAM_CSRAM_BANKS0RAM_BANKS1VCC(CORE)RAM_MAD10RAM_MAD0RAM_MAD1GND(CORE)RAM_MAD2RAM_MAD3GND(AC)MM_AI2MM_AI1MM_AI0MM_PH_A

AF

E_D

B3

MM_BI2MM_BI1

MM_Y2

VC

C(A

C)

MM_Y1

AF

E_D

B0

AF

E_D

B1

GND(CORE)

AF

E_D

B2

AF

E_D

B4

AF

E_D

B5

MM_BI0MM_PH_BVCC(CORE)

MM_Y3

CLP

WM

AF

E_D

B6

AF

E_D

B7

GN

D(A

C)

AF

ES

CK

VC

C(C

OR

E)

AD

CLK

GN

D(C

OR

E)

AF

E_S

EN

CC

D_P

H1

CC

D_P

H2

AF

E_S

DI

CC

D_C

PB

SA

MP

CC

D_R

SC

CD

_TG

VS

AM

PG

ND

(CO

RE

)T

D0

TR

SK

TD

I

TC

KT

MS

VC

C(C

OR

E)

GND(CORE)RAM_DATA3RAM_DATA2RAM_DATA1RAM_DATA0GND(AC)RAM_DATA15RAM_DATA14VCC(CORE)RAM_DATA13RAM_DATA12RAM_DATA11RAM_DATA10RAM_DATA9RAM_DATA8VCC(CORE)RAM_DQM1RAM_CKEGND(AC)RAM_CLK_OUTGND(CORE)RAM_MAD12RAM_MAD11RAM_MAD9VCC(CORE)RAM_MAD8RAM_MAD7VCC(AC)RAM_MAD6RAM_MAD5RAM_MAD4GND(AC)CPUDATA15CPUDATA14CPUDATA13CPUDATA12CPUDATA11CPUDATA10CPUDATA9CPUDATA8

C670.1u

BR60 82J

1234

8765

BR9

1234

R45 0J

R24 33J

BR43 33J

1234

8765

L3ZJSR5101-223

BR48 10kJ1234

8765

BR2

1234

BR2733J 1

234

8765

BR3033J 1

234

8765

C70 12p

R23 33J

BR61 10kJ1234

8765

C47

47p

R34 10kJ

X2

OSC-3148MHz

1

8 5

4N.C.

VCC OUTPUT

GND

R25 33J

R32 10kJ

BR29 10kJ

1234

8765

BR39 33J

1234

8765

C49

47p

BR31 10kJ

1234

8765

BR57 10kJ1234

8765

R27 33J

C6812p

C51

47p

BR53 10kJ1234

8765

BR62 33J

1234

8765

R26 33J

BR63 33J

1234

8765

C50

47p

R29 33J

C52

47p

C48

47p

C66

2200

0p

R30 33J

BR41 33J

1234

8765

C53

47p

BR45 33J

1234

8765

BR33 10kJ1234

8765

R31 33J

X3

HC-49U/S (16.1511MHz)

BR49 33J

1234

8765

C54

47p

BR52 33J

1234

8765

R44 0J

R4333J

BR56 33J

1234

8765

R33 10kJ


C

C

D

D

E

E

4

3

2

1

(1-B3)(1-A2)

(1-A2)

(12-A3)

(4-C3)

(4-C3)

(4-C3)

(4-C2)(4-C2)

(4-D4)

(5-B

1)

(5-B

1)(5

-B1)

(5-B

4)(5

-B4)

(5-B

4)

(5-B

3)

(5-B

3)(5

-B2)

(5-B

2)(5

-B2)

(5-B

2)(5

-B3)

(5-B3)(5-B3)(5-B2)

(5-B3)(4-C2)(4-C2)

(4-C

1)

(4-A

1)

(4-C2)(4-C2)(4-C2)

(8-A2)

(4-C3)

(12-A3)

(8-A2)

(8-A2)

(8-A2)(8-A4)(8-A2)(8-A4)(8-A4)

(8-A2)

(8-A2)

(8-A4)

(12-A3)

(12-A3)(12-A3)(12-A3)(12-A3)

(12-A3)(12-A3)(12-A3)(12-A3)

(5-B

4)

(5-B

3)

(9-B2)

2/14

PIDATA4

PIDATA0

PIDATA5PIDATA6

PIDATA1

PIDATA7

PIDATA2PIDATA3

/REV

/INIT/SLCTIN/AUTOF D/STB

/ACKBUSYPE

/FAULT

SLCT

PARAD1

PARAD2

PARAD6PARAD7

PARAD4PARAD3

PARAD5

PARAD0

/INIT/SLCTIN/AUTOF D/STB

PARAD7PARAD6PARAD5PARAD4

PARAD3PARAD2PARAD1PARAD0

VPINRCV

VMIN

/POREQ/PIREQ

PODATA0PODATA1PODATA2PODATA3

PODATA4PODATA5PODATA6PODATA7

CLKSWMEM_INT

PODATA5

PODATA7

PFCLK

SYNC#

PODATA3

PODATA1PODATA2

PODATA4

PODATA6

PODATA0

RCVVPINVMIN

/H_SYNC

PIDATA[7..0]

PODATA[7..0]/POACK/PIREQ

/POREQ

/PIACK/PIW R

/SCANSP

/SCANST

/TRANSST

/PRINTST

/REV

/INIT

/ACKBUSYPE

/FAULT

SLCT

/SLCTIN

/STB

PARAD[7..0]

/AUTOF D

OP_CLK

TMTM_

OP_LATCHOP_DATA

(/SYNC)

CPFS2PRHL

MPFSMIRONSPFONKEYSC1

KEYSC3KEYSC2

SP

US

SP

FS

VF

M

MR

PS

1

MC

PM

D

CP

FS

1

DE

VD

IR

MR

PS

3

VF

MC

NT

LDE

N

GR

IDL

MM

D

RR

S

SR

RC

MR

PS

2

BIA

S

TC

/LE

ND

VID

EO

#

/PR_LINE

/SC_LINE

/IMC_READY

/FP

OF

F

SG

S

/OA_RST

(/ASIC_RST)

/RESET1

/FWREN

G3.3V

VCC3VCC3 VCC3

VCC3

VCC3

VCC3

G3.3V

VCC3

VCC3

VCC3

R352 33J

C33

0.1

u

R4110kJ

C27

0.1

u

C34

0.1

u

C35

0.1

u

46 47 48 49 51 52 53 54 55 5756 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

86

8483

81

69

8079

72

787776

68676665 7473

82

71

75

85

70

96

92

8788899091

939495

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112113114115116117118119120121122123124125126127128

177

176

175

174

173

172

171

170

169

168

167

166

165

164

163

162

161

160

159

158

157

156

155

154

153

152

151

150

149

148147146145144143142141140139138137136135134133132131130129

50

/VID

EO

/LE

ND

VC

C(A

C)

OU

TP

00A

OU

TP

02A

OU

TP

03A

OU

TP

04A

OU

TP

05A

OU

TP

06A

VC

C(C

OR

E)

OU

TP

15A

OU

TP

07A

OU

TP

08A

GN

D(C

OR

E)

OU

TP

09A

OU

TP

10A

OU

TP

11A

OU

TP

12A

VCC(CORE)

OUTP13BOUTP12B

OUTP10B

GN

D(A

C)

OUTP09BOUTP08B

OU

TP

03B

GND(CORE)OUTP07BOUTP06B

OU

TP

00B

OU

TP

14A

VC

C(C

OR

E)

OU

TP

13A

VC

C(A

C)

OU

TP

04B

OUTP11B

OU

TP

02B

OUTP05B

OUTP14B

OU

TP

01B

TSP_MODE

OPE_CLK

/TMTM

OPE_DATAOPE_LATCH

GND(AC)

VCC(AC)/SCANSP

TSO0

IE1284_STBIE1284_AUTOFD

VCC(CORE)IE1284_SLCTIN

IE1284_INITIE1284_SLCTGND(CORE)

IE1284_PEIE1284_BUSY

IE1284_ACKIE1284_FAULT

VCC(CORE)IE1284_REV

IE1284_PARAD7IE1284_PARAD6IE1284_PARAD5IE1284_PARAD4IE1284_PARAD3IE1284_PARAD2

VCC(AC)IE1284_PARAD1IE1284_PARAD0

SUSPENDGND(AC)

OENVMOUTVPOUT

GND(CORE)VMINVPINRCV

/SCANST

VC

C(A

C)

MD

AT

09M

DA

T08

MD

AT

07G

ND

(CO

RE

)M

DA

T06

MD

AT

05M

DA

T04

VC

C(C

OR

E)

MD

AT

03M

DA

T02

MD

AT

01M

DA

T00

GN

D(A

C)

/INC

S/IN

AC

K/O

UT

RE

QG

ND

(CO

RE

)/H

SY

NC

PID

AT

A0

PID

AT

A1

PID

AT

A2

VC

C(A

C)

PID

AT

A3

PID

AT

A4

PID

AT

A5

PID

AT

A6

PID

AT

A7

/PO

CS

/POREQVCC(AC)

/PIWT/PIACK

GND(AC)/POACK/PIREQ

GND(CORE)PODATA0PODATA1PODATA2PODATA3PODATA4PODATA5PODATA6PODATA7

VCC(CORE)/TRANSST

/RECEPTST/PRINTST

OU

TP

01A

C38

0.1

u

BR93 10KJ

1234

8765

C41

0.1

u

C39

0.1

u

C7147p

C40

0.1

u

BR25 10KJ

1234

8765

BR40 10kJ1234

8765

R354 N.M.

C37

0.1

u

BR37 10kJ1234

8765

R46

10J

BR47 33J

1234

8765

BR26 33J

1234

8765

C42

0.1

u

BR35 10kJ1234

8765

R35

10kJ

C43

0.1

u

C44

0.1

u

BR59 10kJ1234

8765

BR34 33J

1234

8765

C45

0.1

u

C46

0.1

u

BR46 10kJ1234

8765

R40OPEN

R4210kJ

C55

0.1

u

BR50 10kJ1234

8765

BR51 33J

1234

8765

C62

0.1

u

BR54 10kJ1234

8765

R353 N.M.

R28

10KJ

BR44 33J

1234

8765

R355N.M.

R35810kJ

C59

0.1

u

BR28 33J

1234

8765

C64

0.1

u

C63

0.1

u

+C36

47u/16V

C60

0.1

u

L2ZJSR5101-102TA

C56

0.1

u

R3710kJ

BR58 33J

1234

8765

C26

0.1

u

BR32 33J

1234

8765

C58

0.1

u

C30

0.1

u

C57

0.1

uC

280.

1u

BR55 33J

1234

8765

C61

0.1

u

R38OPEN

C29

0.1

u

C65

0.1

u

C31

0.1

u

R310 10J

C39847p

R39OPEN

C32

0.1

u

R311 10J


MCU PWB (Memory section)

R48

0J

C74

0.1u

R51 0JR

4710

kJ

IC7

Flash ROM

A0 25A124 A223 A322 A421 A520 A619 A718

A88 A97 A106 A115 A124 A133 A142 A151 A16 48

A1717

DQ0 29

DQ1 31

DQ2 33

DQ3 35

DQ4 38

DQ5 40

DQ6 42

DQ7 44

DQ8 30

DQ9 32

DQ10 34

DQ11 36

DQ12 39

DQ13 41

DQ14 43

DQ15 45

NC9

NC10

NC16

GND 46

GND 27

VCC 37

VPP13

BYTE 47

OE 28

CE 26

WE11

RP12

WP14

RY/BY15

R53

OP

EN

R4910kJ

IC8

IS63LV1024L-12J-TR

I/O0 6A01

I/O1 7A12

I/O2 10A23

I/O3 11A34

I/O4 22A413

I/O5 23A514

I/O6 26A615

I/O7 27A716

A817

A918

A1019

A1120

A1221

A1329

A1430

CS15

OE28

WE12

VDD 8

GND 9

VDD 24A1531

A1632

GND 25

C73

0.1u

R52

OP

EN

HWRZ

A12

A7

A10A11

A17

A9

A12

A5

A16

A14A1

D14D15

RDZ

A15

A8

A6

D10A2

A4

A10

A14A13

A15

A3

D8

D12

A6

A16

A7

A11

CS1Z

A2

A4

A8

HWRZ

D9

D11A13

A9

A18A19

D13A5

A1

A0

A3

V

VCC3

VCC3VCC3

D[15..0]

/CS1/RD

/HWR

A[19..0]

RY/BY

/RESET0

(2-A1)

(1-D2)

(1-A2)(1-B3)(1-B3)

(1-D3)

Flash ROM

LH28F400BVE-BL85

R51 OPEN

IC7

(1-C1)

(2-C1)(15-B2)

(2-A1)(4-A2)(15-C2)

A

A

B

B

C

C

4

3

2

1


C770.1u

C780.1u

C790.1u

C800.1u

C810.1u

C820.1u

C760.1u

C399N.M.

R4910kJ

IC6

SDRAM (16bit x 4bank)

A023

A124

A225

A326 A4 29A5 30A6 31A7 32A8 33A9 34

A1022

BA020

DQ02

DQ14

DQ25

DQ37

DQ48

DQ510

DQ611

DQ713 DQ8 42

DQ9 44DQ10 45

DQ11 47DQ12 48

DQ13 50DQ14 51

DQ15 53VCC1

VCC27

VSS 54

VSS 28

VCCQ9

VSS 41

VCCQ 43

VCCQ 49VSSQ6

VSSQ12

VSSQ 46

VSSQ 52

LDQM15

UDQM 39WE16

CAS17

RAS18

CS19 CLKE 37CLK 38

NC 40

NC 36

VCCQ3

VCC14

BA121 A11 35

R50 0J

C750.1u

RAMDB0

RAMDB9RAMDB10

RAMDB11RAMDB12

RAMDB13RAMDB14

RAMDB15

RAMDB7 RAMDB8

RAMDB3

RAMDB1

RAMDB5RAMDB6

RAMDB2

RAMDB4

MAD8MAD9

MAD4MAD5

MAD11

MAD1MAD0MAD10

MAD7

MAD12

A17

A1

RDZ

MAD3MAD2

MAD6

D4

D8

D14

D5

D9

D10D2

D15

D3

D6

D12

D1

D11

D0

D13

D7

VCC3

VCC3

VCC3VCC3

/CS0

MAD[12..0]

BANK0BANK1

/SDCS

/SDWDE/SDCAS/SDRAS

DQM0DQM1SDCLKSDCKE

RAMDB[15..0]

(1-A2)

(2-A2)

(2-A3)

SDRAM Vendor/Type

128Mb(2Mx16bitx4bank)

5 LH28F800BJE-PBTL90

0J

IC6

(2-A2)(2-A2)(2-A2)(2-A3)(2-A3)(2-A3)

(2-A2)(2-A2)(2-A2)

(2-A2)

64Mb(1Mx16bitx4bank)

MT48LC8M16A2TG-75(Micron)HY57V281620HCT(Hyndai)K4S281632E-TC75(Samsung)W981216BH-75(Winbond)

HY57V641620HGT-P Hyndai)MT48LC4M16A2TG-75 Micron)K4S641632F-TC75(Samsung)K4S641632E-TC1H(Samsung)W986416DH-7(Winbond)

C

C

D

D

E

E

4

3

2

1

3/14


MCU PWB (Driver section 1)

IC15

74LCX574

D12

D23

D34

D45

D56

D67

D78

D89

CLK11

OC1

Q1 19

Q2 18

Q3 17

Q4 16

Q5 15

Q6 14

Q7 13

Q8 12

VCC 20

GND10

IC17

NC7S32M5X

1

24

53

C90

0.1u

IC20

NC7ST08M5X

1

24

R60

10J

IC13

74HC151

D04

D13

D22

D31

D415

D514

D613

D712

A11

B10

C9

G7

W 6

Y 5

VCC 16

GND 8

C93

0.1u

C83

0.1u

C87

0.1u

C91

33p

R56

10J

R57

10J

C109

0.1u

C88

33p

C84

33p

R3480J

R34433J

R3490J

R5910kJ

R30810kJ

R3500J

C94

0.1u

R31

710

kJ

R333

R30910kJ

R33610kJ

R34633J

C39

3O

PE

N

IC11

74HC151

D04

D13

D22

D31

D415

D514

D613

D712

A11

B10

C9

G7

W 6

Y 5

VCC 16

GND 8

C39

4O

PE

N

BR68

10kJ

1234

8765

R3470J

C38

947

pF

IC9

74HC151

D04

D13

D22

D31

D415

D514

D613

D712

A11

B10

C9

G7

W 6

Y 5

VCC 16

GND 8

C1030.1u

IC18

TC7SBD385AFU

A1 B 2

OE4 GND 3

Vcc 5

R5510kJ

D15

D11

D8

D10

D12

D9

D13D14

/RESET#

5V

5V

5V5V

VCC3

VCC3

VCC3

EN5V

VCC3

EN5V

VCC3

EN5V

SIN1SIN2SIN3

SELIN1SELIN2SELIN3

OP_CLKOP_DATA

SPFMT0SPFMT1

SPFMT3MIRONSPFON

TMTM_

SIN1

SIN2

(SELIN1)(SELIN2)(SELIN3)

(PPD1)(POD)(MFD)

(CED1)(TCS)

(PMRDY)DVS1

(DRST)

(PPD2)(PPD3)

THOPEN(CED2)DSWS

(MMLD)

(SDSW)(SPID)(SB4D)

FW

SPFMT2/MIRCNT

SIN3

MIRCNT

LCDDB7LCDDB6LCDDB5LCDDB4

LCDELCDRS

D[15..0]

/HWR

/CS3

SFTMT0SFTMT1SFTMT2SFTMT3

KEYSC1KEYSC2KEYSC3

KEYIN

DEVDIR

(SCL1)

SDA1 (SDA1)

OP_LATCHPSL

(SDOD)(PD1)(PD2)

SCL

BZR

MCNT

/RESET0

/ASIC_RST

SPFSSRRCSGSSPUS

(7-E1)

(7-E2)

(7-E3)

(4-E2)

(7-E1)

(7-E2)

(7-E3)

(7-E4)

(7-E4)

(7-E4)

(7-E3)(7-E4)(7-E3)(7-E1)

(7-C4)

(5-E2)

(7-E4)

(11-D3)(7-E4)

(4-C4)

(4-C4)

(4-C4)

(10-C4)

(2-D2)(2-D2)

(2-D2)

(1-B3)(1-B3)(1-B3)

(1-A2)(1-A2)(1-A2)(1-A2)

(4-C3)

(2-D1)(2-D1)

Digital Input Multiplexer

3.3V

5V/3.3

(1-D2)

(3-A2)

Extension Digital Output Port

5V

5V

3.3V

3.3V

For CRUM Model Only

(4-E2)(4-E2)

(10-E3)(10-E3)(10-E3)

(7-E4)

(3-A1) (2-A1)(15-C2)

(1-A2)

(1-B3)

(6-D3)(6-D3)(6-D3)(6-D3)

(2-C1)

(1-E2) (11-D3)

(2-D2)(2-D2)(1-A2)

(2-D1)(2-D1)(2-D1)

(1-D3)(1-D3)(1-D3)(1-D3)(1-D3)(1-D3)

(1-D3)

(7-E4)

A

A

B

B

C

C

4

3

2

1


R61 100J

C85

47p

IC16

74VHCT244

1A12

1A24

1A36

1A48

2A111

2A213

2A315

2A417

1G1

2G19

1Y1 18

1Y2 16

1Y3 14

1Y4 12

2Y1 9

2Y2 7

2Y3 5

2Y4 3

VCC 20

GND10

IC14

74LCX244

1A12

1A24

1A36

1A48

2A111

2A213

2A315

2A417

1G1

2G19

1Y1 18

1Y2 16

1Y3 14

1Y4 12

2Y1 9

2Y2 7

2Y3 5

2Y4 3

VCC 20

GND10BR67

10kJ

1234

8765

IC12

74LCX244

1A12

1A24

1A36

1A48

2A111

2A213

2A315

2A417

1G1

2G19

1Y1 18

1Y2 16

1Y3 14

1Y4 12

2Y1 9

2Y2 7

2Y3 5

2Y4 3

VCC 20

GND10

R342100J

IC19

74LCX244

1A12

1A24

1A36

1A48

2A111

2A213

2A315

2A417

1G1

2G19

1Y1 18

1Y2 16

1Y3 14

1Y4 12

2Y1 9

2Y2 7

2Y3 5

2Y4 3

VCC 20

GND10

C89

0.1u

R324 33J

IC10

74LCX244

1A12

1A24

1A36

1A48

2A111

2A213

2A315

2A417

1G1

2G19

1Y1 18

1Y2 16

1Y3 14

1Y4 12

2Y1 9

2Y2 7

2Y3 5

2Y4 3

VCC 20

GND10

C37

8O

PE

N

R34533J

C388

OPEN

C39

3O

PE

N

C39

4O

PE

N

C39

5O

PE

N

C39

6O

PE

N

C3800.1u

C39

033

pF

C86

0.1u

C38

947

pF

R323 1kJ

IC45

NC7WZ17

A11

A23

Y1 6

Y2 4

GND 2

Vcc 5

C39

133

pF

C39

233

pF

BR88 33J1234

8765

R5410kJ

C37

70.

01uF

C920.1u

C379

0.1u

R31

510

kJ

C95

0.1u

R58

10kJ

C10

40.

1u

IC107

NC7ST08M5X

1

24

/RESET#

VCC3

VCC3

5V

3

VCC3

VCC3

5V

VCC3

5V

5V

(KEYIN)

(FW)

(SIN1)(SIN2)(SIN3)

(SELIN1)(SELIN2)(SELIN3)

(OP_DATA)(OP_LATCH)

(SPFMT0)(SPFMT1)(SPFMT2)(SPFMT3)

(TM)(TM_)

(LCDDB7)(LCDDB6)(LCDDB5)(LCDDB4)(LCDE)(LCDRS)

(KEYSC1)(KEYSC2)(KEYSC3)

/VIDEOVIDEO#

(OP_CLK)

(PSL)

(BZR)

/SYNC (/SYNC)

/RESET1

(/ASIC_RST)

SPFS#SRRC#SGS#SPUS#

(1-A3)

(4-A4)

(10-E3)

(10-E3)

(6-D2)(6-D2)

(6-B1)(6-B1)(6-B1)(6-B1)

3.3V

3.3V

3.3V 3.3V

5V/3.3V

5V3.3V

3.3V

(10-E3)(10-E3)(10-E4)

(4-A4) (10-E3)(4-A4) (10-E3)(10-E3)(10-E3)(10-E3)

(2-C1)

(10-E3)(10-E3)(10-E3)(10-E3)(10-E3)(10-E3)

(10-E3)

(11-A2)

3.3V

(11-B2) (2-E1)

4/14

C

C

D

D

E

E

4

3

2

1


IC25

TD62064AF

I13

NC4

NC5

I26

NC10

I311

NC12

NC13

GND17

O1 2

O2 7

O3 9

O4 16

COM 1

COM 8GND18

I414

NC15

IC21

KID65001AF

1B1

2B2

3B3

4B4

5B5

6B6

7B7

E8 COM 9

1C 16

2C 15

3C 14

4C 13

5C 12

6C 11

7C 10

IC27

KID65503F

1B1

2B2

3B3

4B4

5B5

6B6

7B7

G8 NC 9

1C 16

2C 15

3C 14

4C 13

5C 12

6C 11

7C 10

R3431.5kJ

IC26

KID65503F

1B1

2B2

3B3

4B4

5B5

6B6

7B7

G8 NC 9

1C 16

2C 15

3C 14

4C 13

5C 12

6C 11

7C 10

R3251.5kJ

BR107 1.5kJ1234

8765

IC23

KID65001AF

1B1

2B2

3B3

4B4

5B5

6B6

7B7

E8 COM 9

1C 16

2C 15

3C 14

4C 13

5C 12

6C 11

7C 10

BR108 1.5kJ1234

8765

BR109 1.5kJ

1234

8765

PGND

PGND

PGND

24V

24V

24V

MCBIAS

TCGRIDL

CPFS1MPFS

RRS

VFMVFMCNT

MRPS1

HLLDEN

PMCLK

PMD

PR

FTH

MM_Y2

MMDMM_Y1

MM_Y3

SPUS#

SPFS#

SRRC#

SGS#

/MC/BIAS/TC/GRIDL

/CPFS/MPFS/RRS

/PR/VFMC

PMCLK_

/PMD

MRPS_1

/LDEN

MMref1

/MMD

MMref2

MMref0

/SGS

/SPUS

/SRRC

/SPFS

MRPS_2

POFF /POFF

MRPS2MRPS3 MRPS_3

/LEND

MCNT /MCNT

CPFS2 /CPFS2

For SPF/DSPF Model Only

(11-E1)

(2-C1)(2-C1)(2-C1)(2-C1)

(

((

(

(2-C1)(2-D1)

(2-D1)

(2-C1)

(2-D1)(2-C1)

(5-E3)(2-D1)(2-C1)(2-D1)(2-D1)(2-C1)(1-A2)

((

(

(((

(2-C1)

(2-C1)

(2-C1)

(2-A3)

(2-C1)

(2-A3)

(1-D3)

(11-E1)

(11-E1)

(11-E1)


A

A

B

B

C

C

4

3

2

1


R87240J

R8810kJ

D2

KDS226

2

13

IC22BKIA393F

5

67

84

+

-

R687.5kF

Q1KTA1505S

IC24BKIA358F

5

67

84

+

-

R831.2kF

R714.3kF

R78

4.7kJ1/4W

R8510kF

R73

47kJ

R8410kJ

D1

MA700

D40

1SS355

C114

22000p

R671MF

R81300J

R661kF

R82100J

D3

KDS226

2

13

C112

0.1u

R7010kF

C11122000p

C110

0.1u

IC24AKIA358F

3

21

84

+

-

C113

0.1u

IC22AKIA393F

3

21

84

+

-

D4

1SS355Q2KRA119S 1

2

3

R691kJ

Q3KRC106S

1

2

3

R86240J

12V

24V

INT5V

12VVCC3

VCC3 VCC3

12VVCC3

12V

12V

12V

VCC3

5V

5V

PGND

CAS

CRIDL

VFMOUT

HLOUT

/CPFS1/MPFS/RRS

/PR/VFMCNT

MCLK_A

MD

RPS_1

DEN

Mref1

MD

Mref2

Mref0

RPS_2

FTH

RTH

THOPEN

RTH_IN

OFF

RPS_3

SHOLD

CNT

PFS2

(10-A4)

(10-A4)(10-B4)

(10-B4)

(10-A3)(11-A3)

(11-A3)

(11-B3)

(11-B2)

(11-B2)

(6-A1)(6-A1)(6-A1)

(10-B3)

(10-B4)(11-B2)

(11-B2)

(11-A4)

(6-A3)(6-A3)(6-A3)

(1-A3)

(4-A4)

(5-B2)

(11-C1)

C

C

D

D

E

E

4

3

2

1

5/14



R108620J

R104 2.4kJ

R1091.2kJ

R911.5kJ

R110100J

R89

0.68J1W

R1151kJ

R102750J

C115820p

C130

OPEN

R921.5kJ

R9430kJ

C125 2200p

C127 OPEN

C1210.1u

C117820p

R90

0.68J1W

R931kJ

R99 7.5kJ

C116820p

R9530kJ

C126 2200p

C118820p

R100 7.5kJ

C137 OPEN

C134

0.1u

R98510J

R111 2.4kJ

R971kJ

R103 1J 2W

C1190.1u

R962kJ

C132

2200p

C1230.1u/50V

IC31

MTD1361/F

CrA23

CrB20

VsA25

RsA3

VrefA24

VrefB19

RsB12

VsB18

In /A26

In A27

In /B17

In B16

Vmm 22

OUT /A 1

OUT A 4

OUT /B 14

OUT B 11

PG 15

PG 28

C135

2200p

C136

OPEN

0.

R1011kJ

IC29

L6219DS or AMM56219

OUT 2A2

SENSE 23

COMP 24

OUT 2B5

GND6

GND7

I028

I129

PHASE 210

VREF 211

RC 212 VSS 13RC 1 14VREF 1 15PHASE 1 16I11 17GND 18GND 19I01 20OUT 1B 21COMP 1 22SENSE 1 23VS 24OUT 1A1

R107300J

R114 1J 2W

CP20603FA1.5A

PGND

PGND

PGND

PGND

PGND

5V

24VM 5V

5V

24VM

5V

PGNDPGND

PGND

PGND

PGND PGND

PGND

PGND

24VM

MM_PH_A

OUT_A-

MM_AI0

MM_PH_B

MM_BI0MM_BI1

MM_AI1

OUT_A+

OUT_B-

MMref0MMref1MMref2

SPMT_2

(SPFMT2)

SPMT_0SPMT_3SPMT_1

MRPS_1MRPS_2MRPS_3

(SPFMT0)(SPFMT3)(SPFMT1)

OUT_B+

(10-D2)

(2-A3)(2-A3)(2-A3)

(2-A3)

(2-A3)(2-A3)

(5-C1)(5-C1)(5-C1)

(5-C2)(5-C2)(5-C2)

(4-D3)(4-D3)(4-D3)(4-D3)

(11-D(11-D

(11-E

(11-E

Scanner Motor Driver

SPF Motor Driver

(10-D2)(10-D2)(10-D2)

A

A

B

B

C

C

4

3

2

1


IC30

TD62064AF

I13

NC4

NC5

I26

NC10

I311

NC12

NC13

GND17

O1 2

O2 7

O3 9

O4 16

COM 1

COM 8GND18

I414

NC15

C129

0.1u/50V

IC28

TD62064AF

I13

NC4

NC5

I26

NC10

I311

NC12

NC13

GND17

O1 2

O2 7

O3 9

O4 16

COM 1

COM 8GND18

I414

NC15

C12247u/35V

+

D5

MTZ J22B

R3380J

R3390J

IC32

BA6920FP

Vcc 17

GND 8

Rin20

Fin18 OUT1 9

OUT2 5

VM 16

VREF21

RNF 6

PSAVE19

NC1

NC2

NC3

NC4

NC7

NC10

NC11

NC12

NC13 NC 14NC 15NC 22NC 23NC 24NC 25

FIN FIN

VC124

0.1u/50V

R3400J

C12810u/35V

+

R3410J

CP10603FA1.5A

R11247kJ

R11347kJ

5A

R1051kJ

R1061kJ

D6

MTZ J22B

CP30603FA1.5A

PGND

24V

PGND

PGND

PGND

PGND

24VSFT

24VDup

PGND

24V

24VSFT

24VDup

DMT0 /DMT0

_2

DMT1

DMT2

DMT3

/DMT1

/DMT2

/DMT3

(TM)(TM_)

_0_3_1

TMB_OTMA_O

SFTMT0 /SFTMT0

SFTMT1

SFTMT2

/SFTMT1

/SFTMT2

/SFTMT3

SFTMT3

(11-D1)(11-D1)

(11-E1)

(11-E1)

(11-B3)

(11-B3)

(11-B3)

(11-B3)

(1-D3)

(1-D3)

(1-D3)

(1-D3)

(4-D3)(4-D3)

(11-A1)(11-A1)

Duplex Motor Driver

Shifter Motor Driver

Toner Motor Driver

(4-B2)

(4-B2)

(4-B2)

(4-B2)

(11-A1)

(11-A1)

(11-A1)

(11-A1)

C

C

D

D

E

E

4

3

2

1

6/14


MCU PWB (Noise filter/Pull-up section)

C150

OPEN

R135

0.22J 2W

C176

0.1u

C193

0.1u

C151

OPEN

C177

0.1u

C152

OPEN

C165

0.1u

C178

0.1u

R1361kJ2W

R145100J 2W

C138

0.1u

C153

OPEN

C179

0.1u

C154

OPEN

C180

0.1u

C195

22u/16V

+

C139

OPEN

D201SS355

C155

OPEN

IC33

KIA7805

IN1

GN

D2

OUT 3

C197

0.1u

C181

0.1u

C198

0.1u

C156

OPEN

D11

KDS226

2

13

C182

OPEN

C140

0.1u

C190

0.1u

C196

22u/16V

+

C157

OPEN

C189

47u/35V

+

C194

0.1u

C141

0.1u

C158

OPEN

L6ZJSR5101-223

C159

OPEN

C192

22u/16V

+

D121SS355

C143

OPEN

C142

OPEN

D171SS355

C160

0.1u

C144

OPEN

C161

0.1u

C145

OPEN

C162

OPEN

C146

OPEN

C183

47u/35V

+

C191

47u/25V

+

C163

OPEN

C147

OPEN

C184

0.1u/50V

L5ZJSR5101-223

C164

OPEN

C148

OPEN

R1342.7kJ

C174

0.1u

R13220kJ

C149

OPEN

R13320kJ

C175

0.1u

5V

PGNDPGND

INT24V

VCC3

24V

PGND

INT24V

INT5V

EN5V

VCC3

5V

12V

DSWS

24V1(DSWS)

3.3VIN12VIN

(9-A3)

(4-A3)

(10-B4)(10-A4)

A

A

B

B

C

C

4

3

2

1


R131 1kJ

R13939kJ

R15110kJ

R14010kJ

D14

KDS226

2

13

R1523.3kJ

C185

1000p

R1194.7kJ

D15

KDS226

2

13

R1487.5kJ

C186

1000p

C170

1000p

D16

KDS226

2

13

R1497.5kJ

C187

1000p

C200

1000p

C188

1000p

C203

1000p

R153 1kJ

C204

1000p

D18

KDS226

2

13

R154 1kJ

D7

KDS226

2

13

C201

1000p

D19

KDS226

2

13

D10

KDS226

2

13

C169

1000p

D8

KDS226

2

13

R155 1kJ

C202

1000p

D21

KDS226

2

13

D13

KDS226

2

13

D9

KDS226

2

13

R156 1kJ

D22

KDS226

2

13

R12110kJ

R11710kJ

R157 1kJ

R11610kJ

R141 1kJ

C167

1000p

R158 1kJ

R142 1kJ

C173

1000p

C166

1000p

R12010kJ

R159 1kJ

R143 1kJ

R1507.5kJ

R144 1kJ

C199

1000p

R124 1kJ

D27

KDS226

2

13

R130 1kJ

R14639kJ

R125 1kJ

C172

1000p

D28

KDS226

2

13

R126 1kJ

D25

KDS226

2

13

C168

1000p

D23

KDS226

2

13

R12310kJ

R127 1kJ

D26

KDS226

2

13

R11810kJ

D29

KDS226

2

13

R128 1kJ

D24

KDS226

2

13

C171

1000p

R13710kJ

R129 1kJ

R12239kJ

R13810kJ

R14739kJ

5V

5V

5V

5V

5V

5V VCC3

VCC3

SB4D

PODPMRDY

(SDSW)

(SB4D)

(POD)(PMRDY)

TCSMFD

MMLD

DVS1

(MMLD)

(TCS)(MFD)

DRST

PSWSPPD

(PPD3)

DVSEL

(SPID)

(PPD2)

(DRST)

(SPPD)

(CED1)CED2

(PSW)

PPD1

CED1(CED2)

PPD2(PPD1)

PD1PD2

(PD1)(PD2)

SDSWSPID

PPD3

(11-D1)(11-E1)(11-E1)(11-D2)

(11-A2)

(11-C3)(11-C3)

(11-A4)(11-C1)

(11-C1)(11-C2)

(11-D1)

(11-D2)(11-B4)

(10-E4)

(10-E4)

(4-A3)(11-E1)(4-A3)(4-A4)

(4-A4)(4-A4)

(4-A4)(4-A4)(4-A4)(4-A3)

(1-D2)

(4-A4)

(4-A4)(4-A3)

(1-D2)

(4-A4)

(4-A4)

(11-B1)(11-D2)

(11-C2)

(4-A3)(4-A3)

C

C

D

D

E

E

4

3

2

1

7/14


MCU PWB (IMC2 section 1/2)

R225

BR69 150JX41234 5

678

C2830.1U

R235 4.7KJ

BR74 33JX41234 5

678

BR75 33JX41234 5

678

BR114 33JX41234 5

678

C2840.1U

R332 33J

C2940.1U

R232

10kJ

R320 10KJ

C400N.M.

R333 33J

C2860.1U

C2930.1U

R356 33J

C2750.1U

C2740.1U

C2601U

C30015P

R236 4.7KJ

C2780.1U

R334 33J

R233 OPEN

C2631U

C2920.1U

R218 33J

BR77 33JX41234 5

678

C2960.1U

R231

7.5kF

C267NC

R226

C2770.1U

R234 OPEN

R335 33J

BR71 150JX41234 5

678

R237 0J

BR38 33J

1234

8765

BR36 33J

1234

8765

R244 10KJ

C2760.1U

R241 10KJ

BR111 33JX41234 5

678

C2730.1U

BR70 150JX41234 5

678

C2620.01U

C2950.1U

C2970.1U

X432.3022MHz

R243 10KJ

C2870.1U

BR73 33JX41234 5

678

R242 10KJ

IC37

OA-982

GP_C0/PB_ADDR0199

GP_C1/PB_ADDR1201

GP_C2/PB_ADDR2202

GP_C3/PB_ADDR3203

GP_C4/PB_ADDR4204

GP_C5/PB_ADDR5205

GP_C6/PB_ADDR6207

GP_C7/PB_ADDR7208

REG_A9/PB_NCS1178

REG_A8/PB_NCS2180

GP_A126

GP_A2/DC_CHY128

GP_A3/DC_CHX129

GP_A4/DC_PWM130

GP_A5/DC_CHY031

GP_A6/DC_CHX032

GP_A024

GP_A7/DC_PWM034

GP_B0/USART0_TX1

GP_B1/USART0_RX2

GP_B2/USART0_CK8

GP_B3/ANA_SD19

GP_B4/DT_ACKB11

GP_B5/DT_REQB12

GP_B6/DT_ACKA13

GP_B7/DT_REQA14

GP_D0/ADC_A015

GP_D1/ADC_A116

GP_D2/ADC_A219

GP_D3/ADC_CLK21

REG_AD0/PB_DATA0189 REG_AD1/PB_DATA1188 REG_AD2/PB_DATA2187 REG_AD3/PB_DATA3186 REG_AD4/PB_DATA4185 REG_AD5/PB_DATA5183 REG_AD6/PB_DATA6182 REG_AD7/PB_DATA7181

REG_ADDR_VALID/PB_NCS0190

REG_RD_L/PB_NCS3194

REG_WR_L/PB_NAE0195

REG_CS_L/PB_NAE1196

REG_RDY/PB_NWE197

VSS_CORE191

VSS_IO150

VSS_CORE173

VSS_IO136

VSS_CORE121

VSS_IO123

VSS_CORE139

VSS_CORE87

VSS_IO108

VSS_CORE69

VSS_IO98

VSS_CORE35

VSS_IO86

VSS_CORE17

VSS_IO76VSS_IO64VSS_IO54

VSS_IO206

VSS_IO41

VSS_IO193

VSS_IO27VSS_IO10

VSS_IO179VSS_IO164

INTERRUPT_L/PB_NOE198

RESET_L112

TCK114

TMS116

TDI117

TDO113

BASE_CLK/GP_PWM1168

MAIN_CLK/GP_PWM0170 CLK_EXT/GP_PWM2169

TEST_MODE0172

XIN5

XOUT4

PP_HIDRIVE/USART1_RX143

PP_DRIVE/USART1_TX145

PP_NINIT146

PP_NFAULT147

PP_NSELECTIN151

PP_NAUTOFD152

PP_SELECT153

PP_PERROR154

PP_BUSY155

PP_NACK156

PP_DATA7157

PP_DATA6159

PP_DATA5160

PP_DATA4161

PP_DATA3162

PP_DATA2163

PP_DATA1/USART1_CK165

PP_DATA0166

PP_NSTROBE167

PO_LINE_SYNC/ANA_SCLK37

PO_PAGE_SYNC/ANA_NCS38

PO_REQ/ANA_SD039

PO_ACK/PDATA0/PDS040

PO_DONE/PDATA2/PDS242

PO_WR/PDATA1/PDS143

PO_DATA7/LHEAT/PAS_M44

PO_DATA6/LCTRL/CFIRE245

PO_DATA5/AGATE/CFIRE147

PO_DATA4/ACLK/MFIRE248

PO_DATA3/PENABLE/MFIRE149

PO_DATA2/PLOAD50

PO_DATA1/PCLK51

PO_DATA0/PDATA3/PAS_C52

PI_LINE_SYNC/GP_D6119

PI_TR_TGEN120

PI_TGEN6124

PI_TGEN5125

PI_TGEN4126

PI_TGEN3127

PI_TGEN2128

PI_TGEN1129

PI_TGEN0131

PI_DATA7132

PI_DATA6133

PI_DATA5134

PI_DATA4135

PI_DATA3137

PI_DATA2138

PI_DATA1141

PI_DATA0142 SDRAM_DATA15

53SDRAM_DATA1455SDRAM_DATA1356SDRAM_DATA1257SDRAM_DATA1158SDRAM_DATA1060SDRAM_DATA961SDRAM_DATA862SDRAM_DATA763SDRAM_DATA665SDRAM_DATA566SDRAM_DATA467SDRAM_DATA368SDRAM_DATA272SDRAM_DATA173SDRAM_DATA074

ROM_CS_L75SDRAM_CS1B_L77

SDRAM_CKE78SDRAM_CLK79

SDRAM_ADDR1182

SDRAM_BANK183SDRAM_BANK084

SDRAM_ADDR1085SDRAM_ADDR989SDRAM_ADDR890SDRAM_ADDR791SDRAM_ADDR692SDRAM_ADDR594SDRAM_ADDR495SDRAM_ADDR396SDRAM_ADDR297SDRAM_ADDR199SDRAM_ADDR0100

SDRAM_RAS_L101

SDRAM_CS1A_L102SDRAM_CS0_L104

SDRAM_DQMB1105SDRAM_DQMA1106SDRAM_DQMB0107SDRAM_DQMA0109

SDRAM_CAS_L110SDRAM_WE_L111

VDD_IO144

VDD_CORE192

VDD_IO130

VDD_CORE174

VDD_IO115

VDD_CORE140

VDD_IO103

VDD_CORE122

VDD_IO93

VDD_CORE88

VDD_IO81

VDD_CORE70

VDD_IO71

VDD_CORE36

VDD_IO59

VDD_CORE18

VDD_IO46

VDD_IO200

VDD_IO33

VDD_IO184

VDD_IO20

VDD_IO171

VDD_IO3

VDD_IO158

PLLCS_VDDA7

PLLCS_VSSA6

SDRAM_ADDR1280

USB_DP176 USB_DM175

PLLSS_VDDA149

PLLSS_VSSA148

TEST_MODE1177

TRST_L118

GP_D4/ADC_DATA22

GP_D5/ADC_NCS23

VDD_IO25

C2590.01U

R240 10KJ

BR112 33JX41234 5

678

BR113 33JX41234 5

678

BR72 150JX41234 5

678

BR78 33JX41234 5

678

C30615P

C2880.1U

C2850.1U

SDRAM_DATA0

SDRAM_DATA5

_SDRAM_DQMA

SDRAM_DQMA1

SDRAM_DATA11

_SDRAM_DQMB

SDRAM_DATA10

SDRAM_CKE

XOUT

SDRAM_DATA6

SDR

SDRAM_DATA15

SDRAM_DATA9

SDRAM_CS0_L

_SDRAM_DQMA_SDRAM_DQMBSDRAM_DQMB0

SDRAM_DQMA0

SDRAM_DATA8

SDRAM_DATA12

SDRAM_DATA14

SDRAM_DATA3SDRAM_DATA2

SDRAM_DATA4

SDRAM_DATA7

SDRAM_DATA13

SDRAM_DQMB1

_SDRAM_CS0_

SDRAM_DATA1

TRST_L

TCKTMS

XIN

SDR

S

TDI

CLK_EXT

PB_ADDR3

PB_ADDR0

PB_ADDR6

PB_ADDR1

PB_ADDR4

PB_ADDR7

PB_ADDR5

PB_ADDR2

_SDRAM_DATA6

_SDRAM_DATA1

_SDRAM_DATA8

_SDRAM_DATA5

_SDRAM_DATA1_SDRAM_DATA1

_SDRAM_DATA1

_SDRAM_DATA2

_SDRAM_DATA1

_SDRAM_DATA9

_SDRAM_DATA

_SDRAM_DATA7


_SDRAM_DATA1

_SDRAM_DATA1

TDO

PODATA7PODATA6PODATA5PODATA4PODATA3PODATA2PODATA1PODATA0

PB_DATA4

PB_DATA1PB_DATA0

PB_DATA5PB_DATA6PB_DATA7

PB_DATA2PB_DATA3

TRST_LTDITMSTCKTDO

PIDATA1PIDATA0

PIDATA2

PIDATA4

RY_BY

PIDATA6PIDATA7

PIDATA3

PIDATA5

SDRAM_ADDR11

SDRAM_ADDR3

SDRAM_ADDR8

SDRAM_ADDR12

SDRAM_ADDR0SDRAM_ADDR1

SDRAM_ADDR9

SDRAM_ADDR2


SDRAM_ADDR10

SDRAM_ADDR7

SDRAM_ADDR4

/FPOFF

/FPOFF


OA3.3V

OA3.3V

OA3.3V

VCC3

VCC3

/POACK

CLK_EXT

/POREQ

/SC_LINE

CLK_EXT

ES_CMDESS_TS

DT_REQBDT_ACKB

PB_DATA[7:0]PB_NCS1

PB_ADDR[7:0]

PB_NCS3PB_NAE0

PB_NOEPB_NWE

/PR_LINE

/ES_PAGE

/IMC_READY

/ESC_RDY

INT_USBD

WAKEUP

SUSPEND

USBVBUS

(FW)

/H_SYNC

/ESS_RDY

PODATA[7..0]

MDM_IRQ

PIDATA[7..0] /PIREQ/PIACK

/PIWR

TCKTMSTDI

TRST_L

/FPOFF

MODEM_IN

OA_TXOA_RX

TDO/OA_RST

(2-D3)

(2-D3)

(2-D3)(2-D4)

(8-C1)

(13-C3)(13-C4)(9-B3)(9-B3)

(9-A2)(9-A2) (13-C3)

(9-B2)(9-B2)

(13-C3)(13-C3)

(9-B3) (13-C4)

(1-B3)(1-B3)

(1-D2)(9-B2)(9-B2)

(1-A3)(1-B3)(1-B3)(9-D3)

(2-D2)(13-C3)(9-D3)

(2-E3)(9-B2)(2-E3)

(2-D4)

(2-D3)(2-D3)

(2-E3)

(9-B2)(2-C1)(1-B1)

(8-A3)

A

A

B

B

C

C

4

3

2

1


C2690.1U

5 33J

C2700.1U

C2570.1U

L10ZJSR5101-102TA

R2384.7KJ

C2800.1U

IC39

K4S561632D

VSS54

RAS18

WE16

CAS17

VSS41

VSS28

VDD1VDD14VDD27

BA020

BA121

A023

A124

A225

A326

A429

A530

A631

A732

A833

A934

A1022

A1135

VDDQ3VDDQ9VDDQ43VDDQ49

VSSQ6VSSQ12VSSQ46VSSQ52

DQ02

DQ14

DQ25

DQ37

DQ48

DQ510

DQ611

DQ713

DQ842

DQ944

DQ1045

DQ1147

DQ1248

DQ1350

DQ1451

DQ1553

LDQM15

UDQM39

CS19

CLK38

CKE37

A1236

N.C40

BR115 10kJX41234 5

678

C3320.1U

C2990.1U

C3330.1U

C2790.1U

C3340.1U

C401N.M.

C2680.1U

C2780.1U

C2810.1U

R327 0J

C2980.1U

6 4.7KJ

C27247U/16V

+

C26547p

R217

0J

C264NM

C2710.1U

R329

10kJ

C2970.1U

C2900.1U

R330 0J

IC38

GND27GND46

VCC37

IO029

IO131

IO233

IO335

IO438

IO540

IO642

IO744

IO830

IO932

IO1034

IO1136

IO1239

IO1341

IO1443

IO15/A-145

A025

A124

A223

A322

A421

A520

A619

A718

A88

A97

A106

A115

A124

A133

A142

A151

A1648

A1717

A1816

VCCW13

WE11

RESET12

BYTE47

CE26 OE28

RY/BY15

A199

A2010

WP/ACC14

C2890.1U

BR116 10kJX41234 5

678

C256NM

BR117 10kJX41234 5

678

C2880.1U

R328 0J

BR118 10kJX41234 5

678

_SDRAM_CLK

_DQMA0

_SDRAM_CKE

_SDRAM_DQMB1_SDRAM_DQMB0

ROM_CS_L

_DQMB1SDRAM_RAS_L

SDRAM_CAS_L

SDRAM_CAS_L

ROM_CS_L

_DQMA1

_SDRAM_DQMA1

_DQMB0SDRAM_WE_L

_SDRAM_DQMA0


M_CS0_L

SDRAM_RAS_L

SDRAM_WE_L

SDRAM_RAS_LSDRAM_CAS_L

_SDRAM_CLK

SDRAM_BANK0

_SDRAM_DQMA0

SDRAM_BANK1

_SDRAM_CS0_LSDRAM_WE_L

_SDRAM_CKE

T

_SDRAM_DATA7

_DATA6

_SDRAM_DATA2

_DATA12

_SDRAM_DATA8

_DATA8

_SDRAM_DATA1

_DATA5

_DATA11

_SDRAM_DATA0

_DATA10

_DATA13

_DATA2

_DATA14

_SDRAM_DATA7

_DATA9

M_DATA0

_DATA7

_DATA4

_SDRAM_DATA3


_DATA3

_SDRAM_DATA5

_SDRAM_DATA9

_SDRAM_DATA6

_SDRAM_DATA3

_SDRAM_DATA4

_SDRAM_DATA1

_SDRAM_DATA6

_DATA1

_SDRAM_DATA2

_SDRAM_DATA0

_DATA15

RY_BY

SDRAM_ADDR12

SDRAM_ADDR6

SDRAM_ADDR0

SDRAM_ADDR9

SDRAM_ADDR2

SDRAM_ADDR4

SDRAM_ADDR0

SDRAM_ADDR10

SDRAM_ADDR1

SDRAM_ADDR2

SDRAM_ADDR9

SDRAM_ADDR11

SDRAM_ADDR7

SDRAM_ADDR5

SDRAM_ADDR12


SDRAM_ADDR3

SDRAM_ADDR6

SDRAM_ADDR11

SDRAM_ADDR3

SDRAM_ADDR7

SDRAM_ADDR8

SDRAM_ADDR8

SDRAM_ADDR10

SDRAM_ADDR1

_SDRAM_CKE

_SDRAM_CS0_L

_SDRAM_DATA8_SDRAM_DATA9_SDRAM_DATA10_SDRAM_DATA11_SDRAM_DATA12_SDRAM_DATA13_SDRAM_DATA14_SDRAM_DATA15

_SDRAM_DQMA1

_SDRAM_DATA0_SDRAM_DATA1_SDRAM_DATA2_SDRAM_DATA3_SDRAM_DATA4_SDRAM_DATA5_SDRAM_DATA6_SDRAM_DATA7_SDRAM_DATA8_SDRAM_DATA9_SDRAM_DATA10_SDRAM_DATA11_SDRAM_DATA12_SDRAM_DATA13_SDRAM_DATA14_SDRAM_DATA15

VCC3

VCC3

VCC3

VCC3OA3.3V

VCC3

VCC3

VCC3

_SDRAM_CLK

_SDRAM_CLK

SDRAM_BANK[1:0]

_SDRAM_DATA[15:0]

SDRAM_BANK[1:0]

_SDRAM_DATA[15:0]

SDRAM_ADDR[12:0] _SDRAM_DATA[15:0]

SDRAM_BANK[1:0]

SDRAM_ADDR[12:0]

SDRAM_ADDR[12:0]

SDRAM_ADDR[12:0]

/RESET0

_SDRAM_DATA[15:0]

Model

E-Sort Model

FAX Model

Vendor/Type

4Mbit

16Mbit LH28F160BJE-BTL90

LH28F400BVE-BL85

Flash ROM

Flash ROM

(8-D4) (8-E4) (8-E3)

(8-E4)(8-D2)(8-D3)(8-C3)

(8-E3)(8-E4)(8-C4)

(8-D2)(8-C3)

(8-C4) (8-D4) (8-E3)

(8-C3) (8-D3) (8-D4)

(8-E4) (8-D3)

(8-D4) (8-D2) (8-D1)

(8-D2)

(8-D4)(8-E4)(8-C3)

(8-D4)(8-C3)

(8-C3)

(8-C4) (8-D4) (8-E4)

LH28F800BJE-PBTL908Mbit(US)FAX Model

(except US) R327/R328/R330 ; 0J

R327/R328/R330 ; OPEN

R327/R328/R330 ; OPEN

(8-D4)

C

C

D

D

E

E

4

3

2

1

8/14


MCU PWB (IMC2 USB2.0 section 2/2)

C3280.1U

IC41

ISP1581

Vreg(

R

MO

/RESET10

EOT11

DREQ12

DACK13

DD

INT

//

BUS_C

MO

RE

/CS25

/RD26

/WR27

INT28

ALE29

AD030

AD131

AD232

AD333

AD434

AD535

AD638

AD739

DATA040

DATA141

DATA244

DATA345

DATA446

DATA547

DATA648

DATA749

DATA850

DATA951

DATA1052

DATA1153

DATA1254

DATA1355

DATA1456

DATA1557

XT

XT

WAKSUSP

VC

C(5

.0)

2V

CC

(5.0

)37

VC

C(5

.0)

43V

CC

(5.0

)64

VC

C(3

.3)

24V

CC

(3.3

)58

DG

ND

1D

GN

D36

DG

ND

42D

GN

D61

AG

ND

3D

GN

D23

R305 NM

C3260.1U

C320

10U/16V

+

C3150.01U

C3170.01U

L12MLF1608-J

R304

0J

C3190.01U

IC43

NC7S04M5X

2 4

1

C3380.1U

R303100P

C3390.1U

C3250.1U

IC42

NC7S08M5X

1

24

C3270.1U

C3160.01U

C3140.01U

C3180.01U

C3230.1U

C3240.1U

PB_DATA1

PB_ADDR5

PB_DATA2

PB_ADDR3

PB_DATA5

PB_DATA1

PB_DATA0

PB_NWE

PB_ADDR2

PB_DATA3PB_DATA4

PB_NOE

PB_DATA5

PB_DATA2

PB_ADDR7

PB_ADDR0

PB_DATA4

PB_DATA0

PB_ADDR1

PB_DATA7

PB_DATA7

PB_DATA3

PB_ADDR6

PB_DATA6

PB_ADDR4

PB_DATA6

AG

VCC3

VCC3

VCC3

AG

VCC3

VCC3

VCC3

PB_DATA[7:0]

PB_NWE

DT_REQB

PB_DATA[7:0]

DT_ACKB

/OA_RST

INT_USBD

PB_NCS3

PB_NOE

PB_ADDR[7:0]

PB_NAE0

GND

GNDGND

GND

GND

GND GND AGND

GND

GND

GND

(13-C4)(9-B3)(8-A3)

(13-C4)(9-B3)(8-A3)

(13-C4)(9-B3)

(2-D1)

(8-A2)(8-A2)(8-A2)(8-A3)(8-A3)

(13-C3)(13-C3)

(8-A3)

(13-C3)(8-A3)

A

A

B

B

C

C

4

3

2

1


R28

110

KJ

Vreg(3.3) 4

D- 5

D+ 6

RPU 7

RREF 8

MODE1 9

DIOR 14

DIOW 15

INTRQ 16

/CS1 17

/CS0 18

BUS_CONF 19

MODE0 20

DA2 21READY 22

XTAL2 59

XTAL1 60

WAKEUP 62

SUSPEND 63

R302

12KF

R28

4N

C

C329 10P

R285 10KJ

R28

210

KJ

L14

BLM21PG600SN1

L16

BLM21PG600SN1

R288 NC

R28

710

KJ

R301 NM

R28

010

KJ

C3210.1U

R28910KJ

R283 10KJ

C330 10P

L15 DLW21SN900SQ2

R29010KJ

Y112MHz

L13MLF1608-J

R286 10KJ

R293

1.5KJ

C322

10U/16V

+

CN33

UBR23(ACON)

-D2

+D3

SHIELD5 GND4

+5V1

C331 0.01U

PB_NOEPB_NWE

FG

FGAG

AG

VCC3

USBVBUS

SUSPENDWAKEUP

GND FGND_UD1

GND

USB2.0 DEV1

FGND_UD2AGND_UD2

GND

AGND_UD2

GND GND GND

(8-A2)(8-A2)

(8-A2)

C

C

D

D

E

E

4

3

2

1

9/14


CN1

B24B-PHDSS-B

11

33

55

77

99

1111

1313

1515

1717

1919

2121

2323

22

44

66

88

1010

1212

1414

1616

1818

2020

2222

2424

C208

0.1u/50V

12

C207

0.1u/50V

12

PGND PGND

INT24VINT5V

24V5V

EN5V

/BIAS /TC

/POFF

HLOUT

3.3VIN

/PRFW

/GRIDL

12VIN

/MC

To Power unit

(5-C4)(5-C4)

(5-C4)(5-C4)

(5-C1)

(5-C3) (5-D2)

(7-A2)

(7-B2)

(4-C4)(7-A2)

A B C

A B C

4

3

2

1

MCU PWB (Connector section 1)


C21

110

00p

12

CN4

B4B-PH-K-R

11

22

33

44

R16010kJ

21

C205

1000p

12

R162 1kJ21

C20

910

00p

12

C21

010

00p

12

CN2

28FE-BT-VK-N

11

22

33

44

55

66

77

88

99

1010

1111

1212

1313

1414

1515

1616

1717

1818

1919

2020

2121

2222

2323

2424

2525

2626

2727

2828

D30

KDS226

2

13

5VEN5V5V

VCC3

KEYIN

OUT_A+

OUT_A-OUT_B+

OUT_B-

(OP_CLK)

(LCDDB4)

PSW

(KEYSC2)

(LCDDB6)

(SELIN1)(OP_DATA)

(OP_LATCH)

(SELIN2)

(LCDE)(LCDRS)

(KEYSC1)

(LCDDB5)

(BZR)

(LCDDB7)(SELIN3)

DRST

(PSL)

(KEYSC3)

To Operational PWB

To Mirror motor

(6-A4)(6-A4)(6-A4)(6-A4)

(4-C4)

C D E

C D E

4

3

2

1

10/14


MCU PWB (Connector section 3)

R318150J1/4W

CN14

B3B-PH-K-S

123

CN8

B3B-PH-K-S

123

R1774.7kJ

C221

1000p

R1781kJ

D37

KDS226

2

13

5V 5V

24V

(SDOD)

/MCNT

For SPF/DSPF Model Only

To Cover open detect

(White)

(4-A3)

To Mech. COUNTER

A

A

B

B

4

3

2


CN18

B14B-PHDSS-B

135791113

2468

101214

C22

610

00p

C22

710

00p

C22

810

00p

PGND

5V24V

PPD3

CED2PD2

/CPFS2

To 2nd. cassette

(7-C4)

(7-C1)

(5-C3)

(7-C4)

C

C

D

D

4

3

2

11/14


MC

UP

WB

(IE

EE

12

84

Inte

rfa

ce

se

cti

on

)

C24

4

0.1u

C24

5

0.1u

R32

6O

PE

N

C23

3

100p

C23

2

100p

C23

1

100p

C23

0

100p

CN

39

24F

MN

-BT

K-A

123456789101112131415161718192021222324

C23

5

100p

C23

4

100p

C23

6

100p

C22

9

100p

C23

8

100p

R31

90J

C23

7

100p

IC34

74LV

X16

1284

HD

1

A9

2

A10

3

A11

4

A12

5

A13

6

Vcc

7

A1

8A

29

GN

D10

A3

11A

412

A5

13A

614

GN

D15

A7

16A

817

Vcc

18

PLH

in19

A14

20

A15

21

A16

22

A17

23

HLH

24H

LHin

25

C17

26C

1627

C15

28C

1429

PLH

30

Vcc

-cab

le31

B8

32

B7

33

GN

D34

B6

35

B5

36

B4

37

B3

38

GN

D39

B2

40

B1

41

Vcc

-cab

le42

Y13

43Y

1244

Y11

45Y

1046

Y9

47

DIR

48

R20

910

kJ

C24

0

100p

C23

9

100p

C24

1

100p

BR

9022

J1 2 3 4

8 7 6 5

C24

6

100p

C24

8

100p

C24

7

330p

BR

8922

J1 2 3 4

8 7 6 5

C24

9

100p

R19

710

kJ

BR

9222

J1 2 3 4

8 7 6 5

R20

010

kJ

BR

9122

J1 2 3 4

8 7 6 5

C24

2

0.1u

C24

3

0.1u

R19

63.

3KJ

D39 11

EQ

S06

R20

422

J

CN

28

IEE

E12

84_C

N

D-G

ND

30

D-G

ND

26

HLH

IN35

D-G

ND

27

/INIT

31

D-G

ND

28

SG

16

D-G

ND

29

NC

15

SLC

T13

NC

34

Dat

a0

2

Dat

a1

3

FG

17

Dat

a2

4

D-G

ND

19

Dat

a3

5

D-G

ND

20

Dat

a5

7

D-G

ND

21

Dat

a6

8

D-G

ND

22

/SLC

TIN

36

D-G

ND

23

/AU

TO

FD

14

D-G

ND

24

D-G

ND

25

/DS

TB

1

PLH

OU

T18

/AC

K10

BU

SY

11

PE

12

/FA

ULT

32

Dat

a4

6

Dat

a7

9

D-G

ND

33

Shield

R19

810

kJ

/ST

B

PA

RA

D7

PA

RA

D6

/INIT

/AC

KB

US

Y

/FA

ULT

PA

RA

D1

SLC

T

PA

RA

D2

PA

RA

D3

/RE

V

PA

RA

D4

/SLC

TIN

PA

RA

D5

/AU

TO

FD

PEPA

RA

D0

/ST

B

PA

RA

D7

PA

RA

D6

/INIT

/AC

KB

US

Y

/FA

ULT

PA

RA

D1

SLC

T

PA

RA

D2

PA

RA

D3

/RE

V

PA

RA

D4

/SLC

TIN

PA

RA

D5

/AU

TO

FD

PEPA

RA

D0

EN

5VV

CC

3

EN

5VV

CC

3

EN

5V

VC

C3

EN

5V

/INIT

/AC

K

/AU

TO

FD

/ST

B

PA

RA

D[7

..0]

/RE

V

BU

SY

/FA

ULT

/SLC

TINPE

SLC

T /OA

_RS

T

(2-D

2)

(2-E

2)

3.3V

5V

IEE

E12

84C

onne

ctor

F.G

IEE

E12

84D

river

/Rec

eive

r

(2-D

2)(2

-D2)

(2-D

2)(2

-D2)

(2-D

2)

(2-D

2)(2

-D2)

(2-D

2)(2

-D2)

ToN

ICP

WB

AA

BB

CC

DD

EE

44

33

22

11

12

/14


MC

UP

WB

(Mo

de

mI/

FC

on

ne

cto

r)

C359OPEN

C366OPEN

R30

610

kJ

C363OPEN

C365OPEN

R35

7N

.M.

C367OPEN

C368OPEN

C369OPEN

IC46

NC

7S32

M5X

1 24

5 3

C370OPEN

C371OPEN

C372OPEN

C362OPEN

C373OPEN

C374OPEN

C361OPEN

C375OPEN

C376OPEN

C40

2

0.1u

C360OPEN

C364OPEN

CN

37

26F

E-B

T-V

K-N

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526

CN

38

20F

E-B

T-V

K-N

1234567891011121314151617181920

PB

_AD

DR

7

PB

_AD

DR

3P

B_A

DD

R2

PB

_AD

DR

0

PB

_AD

DR

5P

B_A

DD

R6

PB

_AD

DR

1

PB

_AD

DR

4PB

_DA

TA7

PB

_DA

TA3

PB

_DA

TA0

PB

_DA

TA1

PB

_DA

TA4

PB

_DA

TA6

PB

_DA

TA5

PB

_DA

TA2

MD

M_I

RQ

MS

U_S

T1

D1

D0

D4

D7

D2

D3

D5

D6

PB

_DA

TA7

PB

_DA

TA3

PB

_DA

TA0

PB

_DA

TA1

PB

_DA

TA4

PB

_DA

TA6

PB

_DA

TA5

PB

_DA

TA2

MD

M_I

RQ

D1

D0

D4

D7

D2

D3

D5

D6 MS

U_S

T1

VC

C3

24V

PG

ND

EN

5V

VC

C3

VC

C3

VC

C3

/RD

/CS

4M

SU

_ST

1

MD

M_I

RQP

B_A

DD

R[7

:0]

PB

_NA

E0

PB

_NC

S1

PB

_NO

E

MO

DE

M_I

N

PB

_DA

TA[7

:0]

D[1

5..0

]

/OA

_RS

T

PB

_NW

E

/FW

RE

N

ToM

odem

PW

B

ToM

odem

PW

B

(9-B

3)(8

-A3)

(8-A

3)(9

-B3)

(9-B

3)

(9-A

2)(8

-A3)

(9-B

2)

(8-A

3)

(8-A

3)

(8-A

3)

(8-A

2)

(9-B

2)

(4-A

2)(2

-A1)

(3-A

1)(1

-D2)

(4-A

3)

(1-D

3)(3

-A2)

(2-C

1)(1

-B3)

(1-A

3)

(2-D

1)

(2-D

1)

AA

BB

CC

DD

44

33

22

11

E E

13

/14


MC

UP

WB

(Sc

an

ne

rI/

Fs

ec

tio

n)

R16

610

kJ

C21

5

0.1u

/50V

R16

51k

J

CN

3

FF

4-32

-S15

D5

135791113151719212325272931

2468101214161820222426283032

Q4

KT

B11

51Y

R16

85.

6kJ

C21

4

47u/

35V

+D

3311

EQ

S06

L9 220u

H

TW

KA

-221

K

R16

915

kJR

170

56kJ

C21

633

p

Q5

KT

C31

98

R16

715

kJ

CP

406

03FA

1.5A

R16

410

kJ

C21

2

1000

p

D32

KD

S22

6

213

C21

347

u/35

V+

AF

E_D

B4

AF

E_D

B6

AF

E_D

B5

AF

E_D

B7

VC

LV

CL

VC

L

AF

E_D

B2

AF

E_D

B1

AF

E_D

B3

AF

E_D

B0

AF

E_D

B0

AF

E_D

B1

AF

E_D

B2

AF

E_D

B3

AF

E_D

B4

AF

E_D

B5

AF

E_D

B6

AF

E_D

B7

12V

PG

ND

EN

5V

PG

ND

24V

PG

ND

VC

C3

mt_

at_h

ome

CC

D_P

HI1

CC

D_P

HI2

CC

D_C

PC

CD

_RS

CC

D_T

G

CL

BS

AM

P

VS

AM

P

AD

CLK

AF

E_S

EN

AF

E_S

CK

AF

E_S

DI

AF

E_D

B[7

..0]

ToS

cann

erun

it

(1-D

2)

(2-A

4)(2

-A4)

(2-A

4)(2

-A4)

(2-A

4)(1

-D2)

(2-A

4)

1/4W

(2-A

4)

Cop

yLa

mp

Inve

rter

AA

BB

CC

DD

EE

44

33

22

11

14

/14


2. OPERATION PWB

OP

ER

ATI

ON

PW

B (

LED

/LC

D S

ectio

n)

C332100p

R33

310

0J

R33

410

0J

PM

L

LED

311

R32

60J

C331100p

Q30

5K

RA

225S

3

2

1

C327100pC328100p

C33

3

0.1u

RE

ADY

LED

310

Q30

1

KR

C10

6S

1

2

3

C30

5

1000

p

R33

110

0J

C329100pC330100p

IC30

4

TB

6272

5AF

/OUT27

/OUT38

/OUT49

/OUT510

/OUT611

/OUT16

/OUT05

VCC16

/ENABLE13

/LATCH4

S-IN2

CLOCK3

S-OUT14

GND1

/OUT712

R-EXT15

R30

6O

PE

N

R30

210

0J

PR

INT

LED

303

C32

2

0.1u

R32

50J

R32

810

kJ

R32

782

0J

C30

7

open

R30

147

0J

R32

910

0J

SP

ON

LED

308

R30

410

0J

1CA

S

LED

306

Q30

2

KR

C10

6S

1

2

3

R33

210

0J

C30

8

Ope

n

IC30

1

GP

M18

1C0

GN

D10

V5

9

VD

D8

RS

7

R/W

6

E5

DB

44

DB

53

DB

62

DB

71

R32

40J

2CA

S

LED3

05

Q30

3K

RA

225S

3

2

1

R30

310

0J

CO

PY

LED

304

ALM

LED

307

C32

3

open

FAX

LED

301

Q30

4K

RA

225S

3

2

1

MB

LED

309

R33

010

0J

R335560J

C30

6

1000

p

SC

AN

LED

302

R30

50J

R32

310

KJ

LCD

RS

#

LCD

DB

7#

LCD

DB

4#

LCD

DB

6#

LCD

RS

#

LCD

E#

LCD

E#

LCD

DB

7#

LCD

DB

4#

LCD

DB

6#

LCD

DB

5#LC

DD

B6

LCD

DB

7

LCD

DB

4

LCD

DB

5#

LCD

DB

5

3.3V

5VE

N

3.3V

3.3V

5V

PS

L

LED

_V2

OP

-CLK

OP

-DAT

A

OP

-LAT

CH

LED

_V3

LED

_V1

DAT

A1

LCD

E

LCD

RS

LCD

DB

[7..4

]

Pin

Hol

es x

10

To L

CD

=(1.

15/8

20)x

14.9

=20.

9mA

Iout

=(1.

15/R

ext)

x14.

9 [A

]

1/3

AA

BB

CC

DD

EE

44

33

22

11


OP

ER

ATI

ON

PW

B (K

EY

/ B

uzze

r S

ectio

n)

R32

2

2kJ

KE

Y31

8

NM

4K

KE

Y32

5

CLK

KE

Y30

9

SH

PK

R32

0

2kJ

C31

7

Ope

n

C32

0

Ope

n

C33

4

Ope

n

D30

1

1SS

133

KE

Y32

3

NM

2K

C31

3

Ope

n

C31

9

Ope

n

Q30

6

KR

C10

6S

1

2

3

C31

8

Ope

n

KE

Y31

0

PS

W

R31

410

0J

KE

Y31

5

NM

7K

C33

6

Ope

n

R31

110

0J

KE

Y31

9

NM

5K

IC30

3

74H

C23

8Y0

15

Y1

14

Y2

13

Y3

12

Y4

11

Y5

10

Y6

9

Y7

7

A1

B2

C3

G2B

5G

2A4

G1

6

KE

Y30

8

NM

0K

R32

1

2kJ

C30

4

Ope

n

KE

Y32

1

CA

K

R33

81k

J

C33

5

Ope

n

R31

833

J

R33

910

kJ

KE

Y30

6

MA

GK

KE

Y32

0

NM

6K

R34

1

2kJ

D30

2

1SS

133

C31

2

0.1u

BZ

301

PS

1720

P02

1

2

R33

71k

J

R34

0

2kJ

C31

5

47pF

KE

Y30

2

CA

SK

R31

9

2kJ

R31

010

0J

KE

Y31

7

NM

9K

R34

3

2kJ

C32

1

0.1u

R33

61k

J

R31

210

0J

C31

6

Ope

n

KE

Y31

6

NM

8K

KE

Y32

4

NM

3K

KE

Y30

3

DU

PK

R31

71k

J

KE

Y30

4

ES

TK

R34

2

2kJ

R30

810

0J

C30

9

Ope

n

C31

0

Ope

n

KE

Y31

3

UP

K

C31

4

Ope

n

R31

310

0J

C31

1

Ope

n

KE

Y32

2

NM

1K

R31

61k

J

KE

Y30

1

MO

DK

IC30

2

74H

C15

1

D0

4

D1

3

D2

2

D3

1

D4

15

D5

14

D6

13

D7

12

A11

B10

C9

G7

W6

Y5

KE

Y31

2

DW

K

C33

7

Ope

n

KE

Y30

7

AS

TK

KE

Y30

5

EX

MO

DK

KE

Y31

1

ME

NU

K

KE

Y31

4

EN

TK

R30

710

0J

R31

51k

J

R30

910

0J

D30

3

1SS

133

5V

5V

5VE

N

KE

YS

C1

KE

YS

C2

KE

YS

C3

KE

YIN

SE

LIN

3S

ELI

N2

SE

LIN

1

PS

W

F-K

EY

SC

2F

-KE

YS

C3

F-K

EY

SC

1

F-K

EY

IN1

F-K

EY

IN2

F-K

EY

IN3

F-K

EY

IN4

F-K

EY

IN5

F-K

EY

IN6

F-K

EY

IN7

F-K

EY

IN8

BZ

R

2/3

AA

BB

CC

DD

EE

44

33

22

11


OP

ER

ATI

ON

PW

B (

Con

nect

or S

ectio

n)

CN

303

S3B

-PH

-K-S

1 2 3

C30

3

47uF

/16v

C32

4

0.1u

C30

2

47uF

/16v

C30

1

47uF

/16v

CN

301

18F

E-S

T-V

K-N

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

CN

302

28F

E-S

T-V

K-N

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

C32

5

0.1u

C32

6

0.1u

DR

ST

DR

ST

LCD

DB

4

LCD

DB

7

LCD

DB

5LC

DD

B6

3.3V

5V5V

EN

PS

L

PS

WK

EY

IN

OP

-CLK

OP

-LAT

CH

OP

-DAT

AS

ELI

N1

SE

LIN

2

KE

YS

C2

KE

YS

C3

LED

_V3

F-K

EY

IN1

BZ

RK

EY

SC

1

LCD

RS

LCD

E

SE

LIN

3LC

DD

B[7

..4]

F-K

EY

IN4

DAT

A1

F-K

EY

IN2

F-K

EY

IN8

LED

_V2

F-K

EY

IN5

LED

_V1

F-K

EY

SC

2

F-K

EY

IN6

F-K

EY

SC

3

F-K

EY

SC

1

F-K

EY

IN7

F-K

EY

IN3

To M

CU

PW

B

To D

rum

Initi

al D

etec

tor

To F

AX

Key

PW

B

Clo

se to

CN

1

3/3

AA

BB

CC

DD

EE

44

33

22

11


3. POWER SUPPLY

A

1 2 3 4 5 6

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

1 2 3 4 5 6

POWER SUPPLY (120V/127V)


6 7 8 9 10 11 12

6 7 8 9 10 11 12

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

1/1


A

1 2 3 4 5 6

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

1 2 3 4 5 6

POWER SUPPLY (220V/240V)


6 7 8 9 10 11 12

6 7 8 9 10 11 12

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

1/1


4. ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM

P-G

ND

3.3V

IN

7

PO

D

HL

GR

ID

13

TC

GY

OR

GY

WH

/BIA

S/T

C

2

HLN

6 12

PO

D

D-G

ND

15 172

CN

19

24V

P-G

ND

24

OR

GY

RD

BK

24V

P-G

ND

1

HLL

D-G

ND

INT

24V

5

4

PK

/GR

IDL

HLN

N

14

BC

HLO

UT

RD

OR

/PR

L

23

CN

1(1/

2)1

HLL

18 20

LED

PO

D

INT

5V

GY

GY

3

1

TH

ER

MO

STA

T

MC

BIA

S

GY

1 3

LED

PP

D2

PP

D2

D-G

ND

CN

22

12V

IN

FW

PK

PK

GY

LED

PP

D2

PP

D2

D-G

ND

1 2 3

1 2 32

MC

FB

PP

D2

1916

EN

5V

21

5V

22

7

/BIA

S/T

C62

INT

24V

5

/GR

IDL

1IN

T5V

2R

TH

AN

-GN

D1

RT

H2

1R

TH

-IN

AN

-GN

D4 5

PL

CN

101

3O

UT

_B+

4M

otor

OU

T_B

-

OU

T_A

+1

Sca

nner

2O

UT

_A-

CN

4

CC

D-C

P

24

CC

D-R

S

12V

631

CC

D_P

HI1

28 729(A

FE

_DB

4)

CC

D-T

G

VC

L

CC

D_P

HI2

432 1218

(VS

AM

P)

VC

L

916

EN

5V

5

(AD

CLK

)2026

(AF

E_D

B6)

27

D-G

ND

38

(AF

E_D

B1)

MH

PS

CN

3

1014

12V

(AF

E_D

B0)

25(A

FE

_DB

5)

(AF

E_D

B3)

D-G

ND

30(A

FE

_DB

2)

23(A

FE

_DB

7)22

(AF

E_S

CK

)21

D-G

ND

19(A

FE

_SE

N)

17D

-GN

D

15(A

FE

_SD

I)

13(B

SA

MP

)

11D

-GN

D

2P

-GN

D1

P-G

ND

19 28 2924 265 131 7 9 2723 256 21 30171542 83 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22 31 32

4 8

23 7

11 12

OP

PW

B

1D

RS

T2 6

10

1 5 9

31

LCD

RS

LCD

DB

5LC

DD

B6

KE

YS

C2

LCD

DB

4

SE

LIN

3

KE

YS

C1

D-G

ND

BZ

R

LCD

E

KE

YS

C3

LCD

DB

7

DR

ST

DR

ST

D-G

ND

D-G

ND

CN

3

GY

CN

2

HL

WH

HLN

BK

HLL

3H

LNH

LL2

TH

ER

MO

STA

T

200V

EX

ON

LY

120V

ON

LY

CN

002

F-G

ND

WH

RD

1 21 2

2121 BK

WHW

H

BK

RD

LB

BL

BL

BL

PK

GY

GY

PL

PL

RD

RD

YE

BR

PK

PL

BR

LB

PK

PK

LBOR

RD

RD

PL

OR

OR

RD

YE BR

PK

BR PL

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

RD

WH

GY

BR

CC

DP

WB

MC

UP

WB

PO

WE

RS

UP

PLY

PW

B

PO

WE

RS

UP

PLY

PW

B

CN

10

CN

6C

N11

13S

ELI

N2

1 2 3 4 5

Dup

lex

Mot

or

24V

/DM

T0

/DM

T1

/DM

T2

/DM

T3

CN

13

/PO

FF

D-G

ND

3.3V

IN

9 10 11

GY

GY

BL

BL

BL

BL

7162D

-GN

D

3

24V

/MM

6 3

PL

PK

18

GY

PL

4

7

INT

24V

1

CN

20

/VID

EO

GY

5

GN

D

CN

6

MM

LD

5

OR

GY

7

7 15

/LD

EN

LSU

P-G

ND

PM

CLK

-A

/H S

YN

C

/PM

D4

17

GY

PK

6

8

D-G

ND

D-G

ND

4

GN

D

5 14

LBGY

24V

SH

OLD

11

P-G

ND

/MM

VF

M

24V

D-G

ND

2

D-G

ND

3

MM

LD

/PM

D

PM

CLK

-A

12

5

PM

RD

Y

6

P-G

ND

1 28

BL

PK

1

/LD

EN

H S Y N C4

5V1(

DS

WS

)G

YO

R

LBP

K

24V

INT

24V

1

S/H

10D

-GN

D

MM

PM

RD

Y

BL

P-G

ND

/VID

EO

8

/SY

NC

PM

RD

PK

RD

PL

CN

11V

FM

2

GY

PL

PK

GY

/VF

MC

NT

P-G

ND

P-G

ND

23

8

INT

5V1

133

D-G

ND

9N

C

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

CC

D-C

P

CC

D-R

S

12V

CC

D_P

HI1

(AF

E_D

B4)

CC

D-T

G

VC

L

CC

D_P

HI2

(VS

AM

P)

VC

L

EN

5V

(AD

CLK

)

(AF

E_D

B6)

D-G

ND

(AF

E_D

B1)

MH

PS

CN

1

12V

(AF

E_D

B0)

(AF

E_D

B5)

(AF

E_D

B3)

D-G

ND

(AF

E_D

B2)

(AF

E_D

B7)

(AF

E_S

CK

)D

-GN

D

(AF

E_S

EN

)

D-G

ND

(AF

E_S

DI)

(BS

AM

P)

D-G

ND

P-G

ND

P-G

ND

24V

TC

S3

RD

RD

TC

S6

D-G

ND

DV

SE

L2

1

BR

GY

1

81

BIA

S5

CN

5

7

PL

2D

VS

EL

8

TC

S6

5

DV

un5

D-G

ND

24V

22 23 24 25 26 27 28

SE

LIN

1O

P-D

ATA

OP

-LAT

CH

OP

-CLK

PS

LK

EY

INP

SW

DR

ST

D-G

ND

5VE

ND

-GN

D5V D

-GN

DV

CC

3D

-GN

D

LCD

RS

LCD

DB

5LC

DD

B6

KE

YS

C2

LCD

DB

4

SE

LIN

3

KE

YS

C1

D-G

ND

BZ

R

LCD

E

KE

YS

C3

LCD

DB

7

CN

1

SE

LIN

2S

ELI

N1

OP

-DAT

AO

P-L

ATC

HO

P-C

LKP

SL

KE

YIN

PS

WD

RS

TD

-GN

D5V

EN

D-G

ND

5V D-G

ND

VC

C3

D-G

ND

24 628 7 41218 916 5202627 38101425 23 22 21 19 17 15 13 11 2 1

HV

T P

WB

88

/MC

/MC

PK

PK

P-G

ND

3.3V

IN

D-G

ND

24V

P-G

ND

24V

P-G

ND

HLO

UT

/PR

12V

IN

FW

EN

5V

5V /PO

FF

D-G

ND

3.3V

IN

1312 1514 169 10 114 83 72 61 5

CN

1(2/

2)

INLE

TNL

BK

WH

YE

GR

CN

9

CN

001

CN

001

CN

002

P-G

ND

VC

L1 2

INV

ER

TE

RP

WB

1 2 3 4 5

Shi

fter

Mot

or

24V

/SF

TM

T0

/SF

TM

T1

/SF

TM

T2

/SF

TM

T3

CN

27

D-G

ND

1

D-G

ND

PP

D1

1 1

24V

1(D

SW

S)

D-G

ND

CN

7

RD

MF

D3

CN

12

CP

FS

1

CE

D1

24V

PD

11

PK

2

24V

22C

ED

11

PL

RR

S

PK

DS

W

CN

15

2

LED

MF

D

5

BR

PD

1P

D1

D-G

ND

GY

24V

2

BR

CE

D1

GY

GY

2

CN

16

TM

B-O

PP

D1

RD

CN

23

CN

26

4

/MP

FS

/CP

FS

12

22

CN

25

1LE

DP

PD

1

GY

CN

10

GY

MP

FS

1

/RR

S

D-G

ND

1 1

D-G

ND

TM

BR

124

V

3

TM

A-O

2

F-K

EY

IN7

F-K

EY

IN6

F-K

EY

IN5

F-K

EY

IN4

F-K

EY

IN3

F-K

EY

IN2

F-K

EY

IN1

F-K

EY

IN8

F-K

EY

SC

3F

-KE

YS

C2

F-K

EY

SC

1LE

D_V

3LE

D_V

2LE

D_V

1D

ATA

1D

-GN

D

67 412 916 5 38101415 13 11 2 1

4 83 7

11 12

2 6

10

1 5 9

CN

2

13 14 15 16 17 18

D-G

ND

D-G

ND

18 17D

-GN

DD

-GN

D

LED

_V2

LED

_V3

D-G

ND

DAT

A1

LED

_V1

F-K

EY

SC

1F

-KE

YS

C2

F-K

EY

SC

3F

-KE

YIN

8F

-KE

YIN

1F

-KE

YIN

2F

-KE

YIN

3F

-KE

YIN

4F

-KE

YIN

5F

-KE

YIN

6F

-KE

YIN

7

CN

1

FAX

OP

PW

B

OP

TIO

NA

L (F

AX

)

OP

TIO

NA

L (F

AX

)

CA

RR

IAG

E U

N

WH

CL

WH

WH

CL

WH

(1) MCU SECTION (1/3)


24V

mir

24V

mir

D-G

ND

SD

SW

SP

IDS

B4B

5V /SP

US

SP

MT-

1S

PM

T-3

SP

MT-

2S

PM

T-0

24V

3 6 51 24

LED

SP

PD

SP

PD

/SP

US

5VSB

4BS

PID

SD

SW

D-G

ND

24V

232119212853

D-G

ND

SP

MT-

2

SP

MT-

1

24V

mir

132220411176

24V

SP

MT-

0

SP

MT-

3

1

1

2

233

4

4

5

5 112

2

SP

MT

SP

US

SP

PD

SE

NS

OR

PW

B

5VSB

4BS

PID

SD

SW

D-G

ND

12345G

YG

YG

Y

GY

PL

PL

PL

PL

BL

BL

BL

BL

OR

OR

OR

BR

BR

BR

BR

PK

PK

PK

PK

BR

GY

RD

BR

RD

RD

RD

RD

RD

BL

PL

/SP

FS

24V

112

2S

PF

SR

DP

K

/SR

RC

24V

112

2S

RR

CR

DP

L

/SG

S24

V1

122

SG

S(R

SP

F o

nly)

RD

BL

/SP

FS

1424

V15

/SR

RC

1624

V17

24V

mir

24

/SG

S18

RD

PK

RD

PL

RD

BL

D-S

PF

UN

IT

MC

U

PW

B

CN

24

(2) RSPF/SPF SECTION (Optional) (2/3)


10 2218161 2392 8 213 20 24176

MC

U

PW

B

CN

16

145 12 154 11 137 19

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2625

MD

M_I

RQ

PB

_NA

E0

PB

_AD

DR

1

PB

_AD

DR

6

PB

_DAT

A1

PB

_DAT

A5

PB

_DAT

A7

PB

_AD

DR

5

PB

_DAT

A0

PB

_DAT

A4

D-G

ND

PB

_MO

EP

B_N

WE

D-G

ND

PB

_AD

DR

0

PB

_AD

DR

3

D-G

ND

(/FA

X_R

ST

)

PB

_NC

S1

PB

_AD

DR

2

PB

_AD

DR

4

PB

_AD

DR

7D

-GN

D

PB

_DAT

A2

PB

_DAT

A3

PB

_DAT

A6

CN

37

5

D7

D-G

ND

17E

N5V

D-G

ND

16

D1

D4

15 18V

CC

31914

D-G

ND

D3

MS

U_S

T1

2

D0

VC

C3

6 129

/RD

P-G

ND

D2

3

MO

DE

M_I

N

24V

4 2087

CN

38

13

D5

/CS

4

D6

1 1110

Per

sona

l Com

pute

r (I

EE

E12

84 p

ort)

TO T

EL

DIR

3

P3

/PA

CK

PB

SY

P0

P4

D-G

ND

P2

PE

RR

5VP6

/ST

B/F

LT

/IT3

/SE

LIN

3

P7

/AF

EE

D3

D-G

ND

VC

C3

P1

/RE

SE

T

SLC

T

5VP5

MD

M_I

RQ

PB

_NA

E0

PB

_AD

DR

1

PB

_AD

DR

6

PB

_DAT

A1

PB

_DAT

A5

PB

_DAT

A7

PB

_AD

DR

5

PB

_DAT

A0

PB

_DAT

A4

D-G

ND

PB

_MO

EP

B_N

WE

D-G

ND

PB

_AD

DR

0

PB

_AD

DR

3

D-G

ND

(/FA

X_R

ST

)

PB

_NC

S1

PB

_AD

DR

2

PB

_AD

DR

4

PB

_AD

DR

7D

-GN

D

PB

_DAT

A2

PB

_DAT

A3

PB

_DAT

A6

FAX

PW

B

24 182026 25 23 22 21 19 17 67 412 916 5 38101415 13 11 2 1

VO

UT

1V

OU

T2

CN

10

D7

D-G

ND

EN

5V

D-G

ND

D1

D4

VC

C3

D-G

ND

D3

MS

U_S

T1

D0

VC

C3

/RD

P-G

ND

D2

MO

DE

M_I

N

24V

D5

/CS

4

D6

10 8 7 2513 919 18 14 461720 131116 15 12

CN

2

1 2S

PE

AK

ER

CN

1

OP

TIO

NA

L

1 2 3 4

5V U

SB

DAT

A +

DAT

A -

D-G

ND

CN

33

Per

sona

l Com

pute

r(U

SB

PO

RT

)

(3) I/F & FAX (Optional) SECTION (3/3)


[15] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES

[Preparation]Write the download data (extension .dwl) into the main unit.

A USB port is required for the PC.

Create "MaintenanceTool " flooder in the PC, and copy the followingfiles to the folder.

Necessary for program download• Maintenance.exe (← Tool program)

• ProcModelB.mdl

• ProcModelC.mdl

• ProcModelE.fmt

• ProcModelE.ini

• ProcModelE.mdl

Driver• Drivers/2kXP/Mainte.inf (For Windows XP/2000)

• Drivers/Win9xME/Mainte.inf (For Windows Me/98SE)

• Drivers/Win9xME/UsbScan.sys (For Windows Me/98SE)

Download file• Download file (extension .dwl)

Note: Copy the download data file (extension .dwl) to the folder inwhich the maintenance program is included.

When making a folder for the maintenance tool in the PC, do notput a long folder name in the absolute path.

[Example]

Erroneous case: c:\Mainte nance Tool Download

Proper case: c:\MaintenanceTool

1. Initial setting (Serial number setting procedures)

The serial number is set to the PC which is used for downloading. Set-ting is required once only, and there is no need to set again whenrebooting the program.

Note: This setting is required only when downloading the default dataof E2PROM, and is not required when downloading firmwareonly.

1) PC side: Boot "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-168/M150/M155series" in the "Select Model" menu.

(Only to set the serial number, the PC should not be connected tothe machine.)

2) Select "Option" → "Serial Number Setting" on the menu bar.

3) Set the serial number according to the following.

After completion setting, press [OK] key.

4) The serial number has been assigned.

2. Download procedures1) Main unit side: Execute Test command No. 49-01 (Flash ROM pro-

gram write mode).

Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the LCD of theoperation panel. (Press and hold [CA] key and [DOWN] key (leftkey) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.)

2) Connect machine and the PC with a USB cable. (Connect it to theUSB port on the main unit without fail.

3) PC side: Boost "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-168/M150/M155series" in the Select Model menu.

Product Code (P): Enter number (0 – 99)Enter the product code of “3.”

ID Code(I): Enter number (0 – 99)Assign an individual code to each PC uses“Maintenance.exe.”

AR-M150/M155/M155X FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 15 - 1

4) PC side: Check that the "Simulation Command List" tree is dis-played on the integration maintenance program.

5) PC side: When the integration maintenance program is boostedand "The copier is not turned on." is displayed at the bottom of dis-play, select "File" → "Reconnect" on the menu bar.

6) PC side: Check that trees are displayed in the "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" folder in the integration maintenance program. (Iftrees are not displayed, check that the USB connector is con-nected, and select "Reconnect" in procedure 5) again.)

7) PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" in the maintree to develop its sub trees, and double-click "Download DWLData Area" in the sub trees.

8) PC side: Specify the download file (*****.dwl) to be used.

9) PC side: When a download file is specified, downloading is per-formed automatically.

10) PC side: When download is completed, the following message isdisplayed.

Note: Since, however, the machine enters the download data writestate, do not turn OFF the power of the machine at this moment.

11) Main unit side: Wait until "DOWNLOAD COMPLETE!" is displayedon the LCD of the operation panel. When "DOWNLOAD COM-PLETE!" is displayed, download is completed.

Turn OFF the power of the machine, and disconnect the USBcable.

12) Terminate the integration maintenance program, and turn ON themachine again.

Download is completed with the above procedures.


Note: When another machine is connected, connect the USB cableagain and select "File" → "Reconnect" on the menu bar of theintegration maintenance program. Repeat the above proceduresfrom 5).

∗∗∗∗ Inhibition during download (Important)If download is failed, the next download may not be executed. Usegreat care not to execute the following items during download.

• Never turn off the machine.

• Never disconnect the download cable (USB cable).

* If the above inhibition item occurs during downloading, turn OFF/ON the power.

1) When "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the operation panel,execute the download procedure again.

2) If "DOWNLOAD MODE" is not displayed on the operation panel,turn OFF the power and press and hold [CA] key and [DOWN] key(left key) and turn ON the power. Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE"is displayed on the operation panel, and execute the download pro-cedure again.

If "DOWNLOAD MODE" is not still displayed, replace the MCU witha new one.

3. Version acquisition procedures1) Main unit side: Execute Test command No. 49-01 (Flash ROM pro-

gram write mode).

Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the operationpanel of the main unit. (Press and hold [CA] key and [DOWN] key(left key) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.)

2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable.

3) PC side: Boost "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-168/M150/M155series" in the "Select Model" menu.

4) PC side: Check that the "Simulation Command List" tree on theintegration maintenance program.

5) PC side: Boot the integration maintenance program. If "The copieris not turned on." is displayed, select "File" → "Reconnect" on themenu bar.

6) PC side: Check that trees are displayed on "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile" in the integration maintenance program. (If trees are notdisplayed, check that the USB cable is connected and select"Reconnect" again in procedure 5).


7) PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" in the maintree items to develop its sub trees. Select "Get Version" in the subtrees.

8) Check that the following display is shown.

With the above procedures, version acquisition is completed.

• The display of "**.**" means its version is not downloaded. Thedownloaded versions are displayed in a version number as shown in“MCU Boot Version” and “MCU program Version”.

4. EEPROM data acquisition procedureEEPROM data is acquired to the PC. Use this procedure as data main-tenance of EEPROM.

1) Main unit side: Execute Test command No. 49-01 (Flash ROM pro-gram write mode).

Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the operationpanel of the main unit. (Press and hold [CA] key and [DOWN] key(left key) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.)


3) PC side: Boot "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-168/M150/M155series" in the "Select Model" menu.

4) PC side: Check that "Simulation Command List" tree is displayed inthe integration maintenance program.

5) PC side: Boot the integration maintenance program. If "The copieris not turned on." is displayed on the lower side of the display,select "File" → "Reconnect" on the menu bar.

6) PC side: Check that trees are displayed on "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile" in the integration maintenance program. (If trees are notdisplayed, check that the USB cable is connected and select"Reconnect" again in procedure 5).


7) PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" to developits sub trees, and select "Upload EEPROM Data Area" in the subtrees.

8) PC side: Enter a desired file name, and select "Save."

9) PC side: When upload is completed, the complete message is dis-played.

With the above procedure, the EEPROM data acquisition is completed.

Data acquired by the EEPROM data acquisition procedure are savedin a file with extension of .eep.

5. Installing procedures<USB integration maintenance program installation>

Driver installation is made on plug-and-play.

<Installation on Windows XP>




3) The following display is shown.

Select [Install from a list or specific location] and press <Next> but-ton.

4) Select [Include this location in the search;]. If the search location isnot the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver(Mainte.inf), select <Browse>. If the search location is the folderwhich includes the maintenance tool driver, press <Next> button togo to procedure 7).


5) Select the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver(Mainte.inf) and press <OK> button.

(Suppose that the driver is included in C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\2kXp folder.)

6) Check the path to the folder which includes the maintenance tooldriver (Mainte.inf), and press <Next> button.

7) When the following display is shown, press [Continue Anyway] but-ton.

8) When the following display is shown, installation is completed.

Press <Finish> button.

With the above procedures, installation (on Windows XP) of the inte-gration maintenance program is completed.

<Installation on Windows 2000>




3) Check that the Found New Hardware Wizard is displayed, andpress <Next> button.

4) Select [Search for a suitable driver for my device] and press <Next>button.


5) Select [Specify a location] and press <Next> button.

6) Select [Include this location in the search;]. If the search location isnot the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver(Mainte.inf), select <Browse>. If the search location is the folderwhich includes the maintenance tool driver, press <Next> button togo to procedure 9).

7) Specify the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver(Mainte.inf), and press <Open> button.

8) Check that the path to the folder which includes the maintenancetool driver (Mainte.inf) is displayed, and press <OK> button.

(Suppose that the maintenance tool driver is included in C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\2kXp folder.)

9) Press <Next> button to start installation.

10) When the following display is shown, installation is completed.

Press <Finish> button.

11) Restart the PC.

With the above procedures, installation (on Windows 2000) of the inte-gration maintenance program is completed.


<Installation on Windows Me>




3) The following display is shown on the PC side.

Select [Specify the location of the driver], and press <Next> button.

4) Select [Specify a location], specify the folder which includes themaintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) as the search location, andpress <Next> button.

If the search location does not include the maintenance tool driver(Mainte.inf), press <Browse> button to specify the folder whichincludes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf).

(Suppose that the maintenance tool driver is included in C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\Win9xMe folder.)

5) Select the folder which includes maintenance tool driver(Mainte.inf), and press <OK> button.

(Suppose that the driver is included in C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\Win9xMe folder.)

6) Check that the path to the folder which includes the maintenancetool driver (Mainte.inf) is displayed, and press <Next> button.

7) When the following display is shown, installation is completed.Press <Finish> button.

8) Restart the PC.

With the above procedures, installation (on Windows ME) of the inte-gration maintenance program is completed.


Memo

Memo

Memo

LEAD-FREE SOLDER

The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder.

The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.

(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.

Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.

Since the melting point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the exclusive-usesoldering iron is recommendable.

(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting point of lead-free solder is about 220°C, which is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering capacity isinferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land separation or may exceedthe heat-resistive temperature of components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when completion of soldering isconfirmed.

Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.

If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron tip aftercompletion of soldering work.

If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.

Example:

5mm

Lead-Free

Solder compositioncode (Refer to thetable at the right.)

<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>

Solder composition

Sn-Ag-Cu

Sn-Ag-BiSn-Ag-Bi-Cu

Sn-Zn-Bi

Sn-In-Ag-Bi

Sn-Cu-Ni

Sn-Ag-Sb

Bi-Sn-Ag-PBi-Sn-Ag

a

b

z

i

n

s

p

Solder composition code

a

CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT

(Danish) ADVARSEL !Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.

Udskiftning må kun ske med batteriaf samme fabrikat og type.

Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.

(English) Caution !Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or equivalent typerecommended by the manufacturer.

Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.

(Finnish) VAROITUSParisto voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.

Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaantyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden

mukaisesti.

(French) ATTENTIONIl y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect

de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie dumême type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par

le constructeur.Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux

instructions du fabricant.

(Swedish) VARNINGExplosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.

Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalenttyp som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.

Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantensinstruktion.

(German) AchtungExplosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.

Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ odervom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom

Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.

CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)"BATTERY DISPOSAL"

THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY

THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THEBATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR

LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATIONON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.

"TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES"CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE

MÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE)QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LAPILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE

AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DESINFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET

DE TRAITEMENT.

COPYRIGHT © 2004 BY SHARP CORPORATIONAll rights reserved.Printed in Japan.

No part of this publication may be reproduced,stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,

in any form or by any means,

electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwisewithout prior written permission of the publisher.

Trademark acknowledgements• Microsoft® Windows® operating system is a trademark or copyright of Microsoft

Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

• Windows® 95, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows NT® 4.0, Windows® 2000, and Windows® XP are trademarks or copyrights of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

• IBM and PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.

• Acrobat® Reader Copyright® 1987- 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.

SHARP CORPORATIONDigital Document System GroupProducts Quality Assurance DepartmentYamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan

2004 March Printed in Japan